JP2021010531A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To suppress a decrease in interest in a game when it is made practicable to control to a special state.SOLUTION: A game machine can control to a first special state (for example, a first KT state), and a second special state (for example, a second KT state) more advantageous than the first special state as special states, and can control to the second special state based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, a third probability variable jackpot occurs, and variation display is completed for fifty times or a hundred times in a high-probability/high-base state (the first KT state)). The game machine also includes special performance execution means capable of executing a special performance for causing predetermined display to be difficult to be visually recognized once when a game state is switched, and the special performance execution means executes a pseudo closing performance for displaying a specific image and allowing predetermined display to be difficult to be visually recognized as a special performance, and then executes an opening performance for separating the specific image and allowing predetermined display to be recognized visually.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9-23

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of playing a game.

As a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined prize value is given to the player. There is one configured in. Further, a variable display means capable of variable display (also referred to as “variation”) of the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display means, a predetermined game value. There is something that is configured to give the player (so-called pachinko machine).

The winning value is to pay out the winning ball or give a score or a prize according to the winning of the game ball in the winning area. Further, the game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the game machine becomes an advantageous state for the player who is likely to win a winning ball when a specific display result is obtained, or for the player. It is to generate the right to be in an advantageous state and to be in a state where the conditions for paying out prize balls are easily satisfied.

In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) started by the variable display means based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. If this is done, a "big hit (advantageous state)" will occur. The derivation display is to stop and display the symbol. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening opens a predetermined number of times to shift to a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each opening period, if a predetermined number (for example, 10) is won in the large winning opening, the large winning opening is closed. The number of times the large winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the large winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each large winning opening may be referred to as a round.

In such a game machine, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel, and the special state is more frequently controlled to the special state than the non-special state. Some are configured to be controllable. For example, Patent Document 2 describes that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can fluctuate in parallel, and shift to a fireworks rush (high probability non-time reduction state). In addition, it is described that even if the same jackpot symbol is won, it may or may not shift to the fireworks rush depending on the state at the time of winning. For example, if the first special symbol lottery is executed in the normal mode and the 9-round symbol 2 or 16-round symbol is won, the 9-round jackpot game or the 16-round jackpot game is executed, and while shifting to the fireworks rush, it is normal. It is described that when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the mode and the 9-round symbol 2 or 16-round symbol is won, the 9-round jackpot game or the 16-round jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the special normal mode. ..

JP-A-2017-176585 (paragraphs 0057, 0334, 057 2, 0574)

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there are cases where it is controlled to a special state and cases where it is not controlled when it is controlled to an advantageous state, and when it is not controlled to a special state, there is an interest in the game. It may decrease.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest in a game when it is configured to be controllable in a special state.

(Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and the disadvantage setting value (for example, 1 to 3) and the player more than the disadvantage setting value. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values including an advantageous setting value (for example, 4 to 6) having a high advantage for the user. When the game state is switched between the game state control means that can control the game state (for example, the portion that executes steps 080IWS2205 to S2207, S210 to S2219, S2222 to S2225, and S2227 in the game control microcomputer 100) (for example, When an irregular jackpot occurs, when performing a variation display of the 50th variation in a low probability / high base state), a specific image (for example, FIGS. 9-43 (B) and 9-44 (A)). It is possible to perform a special effect (for example, a shutter effect) that displays a still image in a state where the upper and lower shutters 080IW033,034 are closed and makes a predetermined display (for example, a decorative pattern on the left, middle, and right) difficult to see once. The special effect executing means includes, for example, a portion for executing steps 080IWS503, S505, S506, S508, and S512 in the effect control CPU 120, and the special effect executing means includes a plurality of types of specific images (for example, FIG. 9). -46 (A) to (C) still images) can be displayed, and different types of specific images are displayed according to the gaming state when controlled to an advantageous state (for example, low probability / high base state). When the shutter effect is executed in the variation display of the 50th variation of the above, the upper and lower shutters 080IW033,034 including the characters "END" are displayed as shown in FIG. 9-46 (A), and the gaming state is low. When an irregular jackpot occurs in the probability / low base state (normal state) or in the low probability / high base state, “waiting for intense heat” as shown in FIG. 9-46 (B). When the upper and lower shutters 080IW033,034 including the characters of are displayed and an irregular jackpot occurs when the gaming state is a high probability / low base state (second KT state), FIG. 9-46 (C) shows. As shown, the upper and lower shutters 080IW033,034 including numbers are displayed), and as a special effect, after performing a pseudo-closed effect of displaying a specific image and making the predetermined display difficult to see, the specific image is separated. Opening effect that makes the predetermined display visible (eg For example, a moving image in which the upper and lower shutters 080IW033,034 shown in FIGS. 9-43 (C) to (F) and 9-44 (B) and (C) are gradually opened) is executed, and further, an advantageous state is executed. (For example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 12) and a suggestion effect suggesting that the CPU 103 is controlled in an advantageous state based on the determination result of the determination means. (For example, the reach effect) can be executed in a mode including a specific effect (for example, a cut-in effect of the pattern CI-3) and a mode not including the specific effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 shows FIG. 13-18. The part that executes the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 7 after executing the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIG. 7) and the special notification effect (a part that notifies that the effect is different from the specific effect and is controlled to an advantageous state). For example, after the special notification effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) can execute the cut-in effect of the pattern CI-4 (for example, the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIGS. 13-18), the variable display shown in FIG. The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state of a big hit A or a big hit B) and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. (For example, a jackpot gaming state of jackpot C), and when the suggestion effect executing means is set to a disadvantageous set value and it is not determined by the determining means to be controlled to an advantageous state, a specific effect is performed. The suggestion effect of the including aspect cannot be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-21 (B), the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3 and the variable display result. If is out of the question, the cut-in effect is set to the advantageous setting value (the part that cannot be executed in the pattern CI-3), and it is specified when it is not determined by the determining means to be controlled to the advantageous state. Suggestion effects of aspects including effects can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 (C) to 13-21 (E), the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are 4 to 6 If any of the above and the variable display result is out of order, the cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3), and if the special notification effect is executed and controlled to an advantageous state, the second When controlled to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 and 13-22, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-4, the variable display result is always a big hit. When the suggestion effect of the mode including the specific effect is executed and controlled to the advantageous state, it is controlled to the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state (for example, the part controlled by the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot C). As shown in FIGS. 13-21 and 13-22, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3, when the variable display result is a big hit, one of the big hit A, the big hit B, and the big hit C It is characterized by the fact that it is controlled by the jackpot game state). According to such a configuration, it is possible to smoothly hide a predetermined display and switch the display with a simple display in a special effect. In addition, the player can be focused on whether or not the special notification effect is executed, and the suggestion effect including the specific effect may be executed and controlled to the second advantageous state, so that the advantageous setting value is set. If it is set, it is possible to reduce the deterioration of the game interest when the suggestion effect including the specific effect is executed and is not controlled to the advantageous state.

(Means 2) In means 1, variable display execution capable of executing variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) in parallel. Means (for example, a portion that executes steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100) and advantageous state control means (for example, for game control) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. A special state control means (for example, step S126 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state (for example, a portion that executes steps S122 to S125) in the microcomputer 100). Steps in the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, the part for executing S128) and the special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100) that can control the special state (for example, the KT state) that is more frequently controlled to the special state than the non-special state The special state control means includes, as special states, a first special state (for example, a first KT state) and the first special state, which includes 080IWS2205 to S2207, S220 to S2219, S2222 to S2225, and S2227. It is possible to control the second special state (for example, the second KT state), which is more advantageous than the above, and a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the third probability variation jackpot has been achieved, and the high probability / high base state (first KT)). The second special state can be controlled based on the fact that the variation display of 50 times or 100 times is completed in the state) (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has steps 080IWS67A to S71A, S67B to S71B, S2226, (Execute S2227), when controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display of the second identification information when controlled to the non-special state, when the second identification information is controlled to the second special state It is more difficult to satisfy a predetermined condition than when it is controlled to an advantageous state based on a variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-23, a first probability variation jackpot during a high probability / low base state (second KT state)). When the second probability variation jackpot occurs, it is immediately controlled to the high probability / low base state (second KT state), whereas the first probability variation jackpot or the second probability variation jackpot during the low probability / low base state (normal state). When a probabilistic jackpot occurs, it is controlled to a high probability / high base state (1st KT state), and then when 50 or 100 fluctuation displays are completed, a high probability / low base state is reached. (Controlled by the second KT state)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when it is configured to be controllable in a special state.

(Means 3) When the means 1 or the means 2 is controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display of the first identification information when controlled to the second special state, when the means is controlled to the non-special state. A predetermined condition is more likely to be satisfied than when the first identification information is controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-23, the first is during the low probability / low base state (normal state). When the 1st probability variation jackpot or the 2nd probability variation jackpot occurs, it is controlled to the high probability / high base state (1st KT state), and then when the fluctuation display of 50 times or 100 times is completed, the high probability / low base state (high probability / low base state). While it is controlled to the 2nd KT state), when the 1st probability variation jackpot or the 2nd probability variation jackpot occurs during the high probability / low base state (2nd KT state), the high probability / low base state (1st) is immediately established. It is controlled to (2KT state), and as shown in FIG. 9-3, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the selection rate of the first probability variation jackpot and the second probability variation jackpot is high). It may have been done. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to lose his interest.

(Means 4) When any of the means 1 to the means 3 is set to a set value having a low advantage, the predetermined condition is more likely to be satisfied than when the set value has a high advantage (means 4). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, since the jackpot probability is the lowest at the set value "1", the jackpot will be a jackpot in the high probability / high base state (first KT state) 50. It may be configured so that it is easy to execute up to 100 times or 100 times of fluctuation display, and it is easy to shift to a high probability / low base state (second KT state)). According to such a configuration, even when the setting value has a low advantage, it is possible to have expectations, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions relating to the gaming machines of the following means 5 to 9. Conventionally, in a game machine, it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-2010902, and any setting. There were some that could perform an effect (specific effect) that suggested whether a value was set. In such a game machine, the variable display result was not a big hit (it was not controlled to the advantageous state) because the variable display result was out of order (not controlled to the advantageous state) by executing the specific effect. ) Instead, it is conceivable to notify that the set value set in the game machine is an advantageous set value (advantageous set value) for the player and suppress the deterioration of the game interest. Further, some conventional game machines can execute a special notification effect for notifying that the variable display result becomes a big hit during the variable display, but if it is possible to execute a specific effect on such a game machine, it is special. There is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to pay attention to both the notification effect and the specific effect, and the decrease in the game interest is deteriorated. In view of this point, it is required to provide a game machine capable of reducing the decrease in the game interest.

(Means 5) It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and the disadvantage setting value (for example, 1 to 3) and the advantage that the advantage for the player is higher than the disadvantage setting value. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values including set values (for example, 4 to 6), and determined to be controlled in an advantageous state. A suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect) suggesting that the CPU 103 is controlled to an advantageous state based on the possible determination means (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 12) and the determination result of the determination means. ) Can be executed in a mode including and a mode not including the specific effect (for example, the cut-in effect of the pattern CI-3) (for example, the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 13-18 by the effect control CPU 120). A special notification effect (for example, pattern CI-) for notifying that the effect different from the specific effect is controlled in an advantageous state and the portion in which the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 7 is executed after the determination process is executed. The special notification effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIGS. 13-18, and then the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 7 is executed. Part), and the advantageous states are the first advantageous state (for example, the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot A and the jackpot B) and the second advantageous state (for example, the jackpot C) which is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. When the suggestion effect execution means is set to a disadvantageous set value and it is not determined by the determination means to be controlled in an advantageous state, the suggestion effect of the mode including the specific effect is included. (For example, as shown in FIG. 13-21 (B), the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result is out of order. Is a portion in which the cut-in effect cannot be executed in the pattern CI-3), is set to an advantageous set value, and is not determined to be controlled in an advantageous state by the determining means, an embodiment including the specific effect. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 (C) to 13-21 (E), the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). If the variable display result is out of alignment, the cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3), and if the special notification effect is executed and controlled to an advantageous state, the second advantageous state When the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-4 as shown in FIGS. 13-21 and 13-22, the variable display result is always a big hit and the big hit game state of the big hit C. When the suggestive effect of the aspect including the specific effect is executed and controlled to the advantageous state, it is controlled to the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 13-21 and FIG. As shown in 13-22, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, when the variable display result becomes a big hit, it is controlled to be one of the big hit A, the big hit B, and the big hit C. The part) is characterized. According to this feature, the player can pay attention to whether or not the special notification effect is executed, and the suggestion effect including the specific effect may be executed and controlled to the second advantageous state. When the advantageous setting value is set, the suggestion effect including the specific effect is executed and the decrease in the game interest when the advantageous state is not controlled can be reduced.

(Means 6) In the means 5, when the suggestion effect is executed, it is once suggested that the suggestion effect is not controlled, and then the special pattern (recovery shown in FIG. 13-6) is notified that the suggestion effect is controlled. When the super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-5)) that executes the effect is controlled in an advantageous state by a special pattern, the ratio of the suggestion effect of the mode including the specific effect is specified is specified. The variation of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect is lower than the ratio at which the suggestion effect of the mode that does not include the effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 (A) to 13-21 (E)). When the variable display is executed by the pattern, the ratio of executing the cut-in effect by the pattern CI-3 is set lower than when the variable display is executed by the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect. The part) is characteristic. According to this feature, when it is suggested that the suggestion effect including the specific effect is executed and the advantageous state is not controlled, the special pattern is set even though the player recognizes that the advantageous setting value is set. By notifying that the control is performed in an advantageous state, it is possible to reduce the deterioration of the game interest due to an error in the recognition.

(Means 7) In means 5 or means 6, a special effect (for example, a notice effect of pattern YE-4) that notifies that the effect is different from the specific effect and is controlled in an advantageous state can be executed. The special effect executing means is controlled to an advantageous state by providing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the advance notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 13-25 and then executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 7). When the suggestion effect of the mode including the specific effect is executed, the execution of the special effect is restricted (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-26 (A), the variable display result is a big hit and the cut-in When it is decided to execute the effect in the pattern CI-3 or the pattern CI-4, which are the effect patterns with high expectation of big hit, when the advance notice effect is executed, the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE with high expectation of big hit are executed. The feature is that the effect pattern is determined from the effect patterns (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) excluding -4. According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from being recognized in advance that the special effect is controlled to the advantageous state by executing the special effect when the specific effect is executed, so that the control to the advantageous state is performed. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is played, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(Means 8) In any one of the means 5 to the means 7, as a predetermined effect (for example, a notice effect) that is different from the specific effect and suggests that the effect is controlled in an advantageous state, the first predetermined effect ( For example, it is possible to execute the pattern YE-1 and the pattern YE-2) and the second predetermined effect (for example, the pattern YE-3) that suggests that the first predetermined effect is controlled in a more advantageous state than the first predetermined effect. The predetermined effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the advance notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 13-25 and then executes the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 7) is provided, and the predetermined effect executing means is advantageous. When the suggestion effect is executed in a mode including the specific effect when the set value is set and it is not determined by the determining means to be controlled in an advantageous state, the second predetermined effect is executed. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 13-26, any of 4 to 6 is set as a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the cut-in effect is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit. If the execution in -3 is decided, when executing the advance notice effect, from the effect patterns (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) excluding the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4, which have high expectation of big hits. It is characterized by (determining the production pattern). According to this feature, the player's expectation that the specific effect and the second predetermined effect are controlled to the advantageous state is excessively increased even though the specific effect is not controlled to the advantageous state. Can be prevented.

(Means 9) In any one of the means 5 to the means 8, as a gaming state different from the advantageous state, a first gaming state (for example, a low probability low base state and a low probability high base state) and the first game A second gaming state (for example, a high-accuracy high-base state) that is more advantageous to the player than the state, and a game control means that can be controlled (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 12) are provided. , The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect in the first gaming state and the second gaming state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-13 and 13-14, the CPU 103 is super regardless of the gaming state. Reach variation pattern selectable part), suggestion of an aspect including a specific effect in the second gaming state when it is set to an advantageous set value and it is not determined to be controlled to an advantageous state by a determining means. The rate at which the effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the suggestion effect of the mode including the specific effect is executed in the first gaming state (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-21, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. When the set value is any of 4 to 6 and the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of the super reach γ, if the set values are the same, the cut-in is performed in the high accuracy and high base state. The rate at which the effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 is set higher than the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 in the low accuracy low base state or the low accuracy high base state). It is characterized by. According to this feature, in the second gaming state, the suggestion effect of the mode including the specific effect not controlled by the advantageous state indicating that the advantageous set value is set is more likely to be executed than in the first game state. The interest of the second game state can be improved.

In addition, the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 1st special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing. It is the flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the character control normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the gate passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the list of the game state which is controlled after the big hit game for each big hit type. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how of transition of a game state. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of the effect control main processing in a feature part 080IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the stop symbol of a small symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the process of waiting for a variable display start. It is a flowchart which shows the shutter effect start process 1 and the shutter effect start process 2. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the production process during a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the ending effect processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating display mode of right-handed notification. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect mode of a shutter effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the switching mode of the display of a decorative pattern. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect mode of the shutter effect executed in the 50th variation of an irregular jackpot and a low probability / high base state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating image data used in a shutter effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display method of the still image used in a shutter effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the type of the image displayed by the shutter effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during execution of the variation display of one special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing in modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing in modification 1. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variation display when a small hit is made in the variation display of the other special symbol during execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing in modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing in modification 2. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variation display when a small hit is made in the variation display of the other special symbol during execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing in modification 3. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variation display when a small hit is made in the variation display of the other special symbol during execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing in modification 4. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing in modification 4. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the switching mode of the display of a decorative pattern in modification 5. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing in the modification 6. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of the command analysis processing in the modification 6. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each big hit. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for detachment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the random value value determination processing at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the cut-in effect determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the cut-in effect determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the cut-in effect determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination rate of an effect pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination rate of an effect pattern. It is explanatory drawing of the production pattern of a cut-in effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio in the cut-in effect pattern CI-3. It is a flowchart which shows the advance notice production decision processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution ratio of the advance notice effect and the determination rate of an effect pattern, and is explanatory drawing of the effect pattern of the advance notice effect. It is explanatory drawing of the notice production execution period for each variation pattern. It is explanatory drawing of the notice production execution period for each variation pattern. It is explanatory drawing of the notice production execution period for each variation pattern. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the advance notice effect in the variable display. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the cut-in effect in the variable display. It is a figure which shows the notification mode of the variable display result for every variation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the decision rate of the effect pattern in the modification 208SG-1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the decision rate of the effect pattern in the modification 208SG-2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the decision rate of the effect pattern in the modification 208SG-3. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the advance notice effect and the determination rate of an effect pattern in a modification 208SG-4. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the decision rate of the effect pattern in the modification 208SG-5. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the decision rate of the effect pattern in the modification 208SG-6. It is a figure which shows the execution period of the set value suggestion effect and the execution decision ratio of the set value suggestion effect in the modification 208SG-7.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

Further, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a right-handed display 26 for prompting a right-handed operation of aiming at the right side of the game area and performing a firing operation is provided. There is. The right-handed display 26 is composed of, for example, LEDs, and is lit and controlled by a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is held is provided. In this example, the first hold display area 5A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure and the second hold display for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure. A region 5B is provided. A display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-handed notification LED 37 for prompting a right-handed operation is provided. The right-handed notification LED 37 is lit and controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LED lights.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning opening is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening is guided to the back surface of the game board 2 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Further, a row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first start winning opening, so that the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area does not enter the area provided with the first starting winning opening. Has been done. In this way, by providing the row of nails 19 for preventing the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area from entering, the game ball is launched by aiming at the left side of the game area (so-called left-handed strike). The game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when the operation) is performed.

In this example, since the row of nails 19 is provided, the game ball can be won in the first start winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed. Not limited to. For example, since the first start winning opening is provided on the left side of the game area, the game ball may be configured to be able to win the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed, or the first starting winning opening may be won. A game ball may be configured to be able to win a prize in the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed by providing the mouth on the left side of the game area and also providing the row of nails 19.

A passing gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. The game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

Below the passing gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 that forms a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows in the front-rear direction to move the bottom surface. The large winning opening located below the member is changed into an open state (also referred to as an open state) in which the game ball can win a prize and a closed state (also referred to as a closed state) in which the game ball cannot win a prize. The special variable winning ball device 7 moves the bottom member forward in the jackpot game state that occurs when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the rear, and the opening control is executed so that the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning opening for small hits and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning opening are provided. FIG. As shown in, a special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and a variable winning ball device 6B is arranged adjacent to the right side thereof. The special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and have a plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of a flow path through which the game ball flows in the front-rear direction. By moving forward and backward, the game ball can be won in the special winning opening and the second starting winning opening located below the bottom member (also called the open state) and the game ball cannot be won in the closed state (closed state). Change to). The special variable winning ball device 17 has a bottom member in a small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state of being moved forward toward the front, and the opening control is executed to open the special winning opening which is the winning area. Further, the variable winning ball device 6B moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front when the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. The opening control for opening the second starting winning opening, which is the winning area, is executed.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed so as to have the same structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed so as to be slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, the game ball dropped on the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed. If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, it moves on the special variable winning ball device 7 from the upper left to the lower right, and falls on the variable winning ball device 6B below it.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are formed. The game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B when the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is closed. Go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged adjacent to each other, the special variable winning ball device 7 is placed on the variable winning ball device 6B without winning a prize. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning opening is in the open state, the gaming ball wins the second starting winning opening and the special variable winning ball The game ball does not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second starting winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward and the special winning opening is in the open state, the game ball wins the special winning opening. Further, if the special winning opening is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and falls toward the out opening as it is.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of regulatory pieces for reducing the flow speed of the game ball flowing down on the bottom surface member. There is. In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with a restricting piece, so that the game flows down from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the movement of the front-back component, and the time required for the flow is delayed as compared with the case without the regulation piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. However, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are arranged. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 6B is used as the special variable winning ball device. Since the game ball is configured to flow toward 17, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. It can be said that it is.

A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the large winning opening is provided in the large winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is open-controlled and the large winning opening is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed and controlled and the large winning opening is closed, the player cannot pass (enter) the game ball through the large winning opening to obtain the winning ball. It will be a disadvantage.

A switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the special winning opening is provided in the special winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of winning balls is smaller than that when the game ball wins the large winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) through other winning holes such as the first starting winning opening 1 and the second starting winning opening. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is open-controlled and the special winning opening is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is closed and controlled and the special winning opening is closed, the player cannot obtain the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball through the special winning opening. It will be a disadvantage.

Further, in the second start winning opening, a second starting opening switch 22B capable of detecting a winning game ball in the second starting winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, a passing gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening), a variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening), and a special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) Is provided on the right side of the game area, so when a big hit game or a KT state (so-called small hit time) is in progress, the player aims at the right side of the game area and launches (so-called right-handed operation). )I do.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal pattern game.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, since the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, the passing gate 41 plays a role as a normal starting area. However, even when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the passage gate 41 also plays a role as an operating region because the game shifts to the jackpot game state based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41. Therefore, the passing gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that plays the role of both a normal starting region and an operating region.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and further, frame LEDs 9 for game effects are provided around the game area. ..

A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (so-called left-handed operation) aiming at the left side of the gaming area. When the player performs a left-handed operation by rotating the ball striking handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol is displayed. The first special figure game by the device 4A is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) as a confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "big hit". .. Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing". Even in the first special figure game, the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed at an extremely low rate, and may be configured to be a "small hit".

After the display result in the first special figure game becomes "big hit", the game is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state is a combination of the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an open upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, prepare multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening, and gaming states (normal state, probability change state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) after the big hit game state. , The jackpot type is set according to these. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a probability variation state, a KT state, or a high base state according to the jackpot type.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), the probability variation control is executed in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

In the KT state, KT control is executed, which is more likely to be a small hit than in the normal state. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, since a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small hit game state, the number of prize balls obtained is smaller than that in the big hit game state, but it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the high base state, the control (time reduction control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shorter than the normal state (time reduction state) is executed (time reduction state). Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed by improving the probability of becoming the game ball from the normal state. The high base state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

The probabilistic state, KT state, and high base state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. To do. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called a number cut (number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a probability variation state, a KT state, and a high base state, and the display result in the special figure game is "big hit". The pachinko game machine 1 controls the same as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (when a predetermined return process is not executed after the power is turned on, for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in a state of being reset.

When the jackpot game is completed and the game state is controlled to the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (right-handed operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. When the player performs a right-handed strike operation on the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit". If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "big hit", the game is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the small hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed).

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a point of the frame LED9. Equal / extinguishing, operation of the movable body 32, etc. may be performed.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern is in the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", the fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and then the variable display is restarted to make one variable display look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state having the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24). )) Detect signals (such as a detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed or entered and the switch is turned on) are taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a solenoid 81, a solenoid 82, a signal for turning on the solenoid 83, etc.) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or a prize-winning door. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further controls the sound designation signal (the signal that specifies the sound to be output) in order to output the sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37. It is supplied to the substrate 13 or an LED signal (a signal for designating an LED lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the LED control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37, drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 based on the LED signal, and is in a manner specified by the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 are turned on / off. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the LED.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, LED lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, LED signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, LED signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the LED control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state at the time when the power supply is stopped is restored, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process (step S25A). When the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, the execution and hold management of the first special symbol game are realized (details will be described later). Further, the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process (step S25B). When the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, the execution and hold management of the second special symbol game are realized. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to simultaneously execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel.

Following the first special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process process (step S25C). When the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process process for each timer interrupt, it is possible to control the big hit game state, the small hit game state, the game state, and the like (details will be described later).

Following the accessory control process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

Further, although the description is omitted in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal is a process for outputting a test signal so that the control state of the game machine can be confirmed outside the game machine. Processing is also executed. In the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 also controls to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can identify the period during which the right-handed operation is performed. Specifically, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 controls to output a right-handed test signal during the big hit game, during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and during the KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 does not control to output a right-handed test signal during the small hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process process. In this first special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the first start winning determination process (step S101A).

In the first start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning in the first starting winning opening, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When a start prize is generated in the first start prize opening, a random value for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information in the first hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. Will be done. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the first hold storage number, transmission for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination results such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the first hold memory number, and the look-ahead determination on the effect control board 12. The settings are made. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is controlled by the main board 11 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the first special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

After executing the first start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110A to S113A according to the value of the first special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110A to S113A) of the first special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The first special symbol normal process in step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this first special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reserved information and the like. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as "big hit" or "small hit" or "big hit" is set based on the random value for determining the display result. The jackpot type of the case is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. .. After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal processing ends.

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The first variation pattern setting process in step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “1”. In this first fluctuation pattern setting process, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are set using random values for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". It includes processing to decide which one to use. In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The first special symbol variation process in step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “2”. In this first special symbol variation process, the process of setting the first special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol are measured. Processing to be done is included. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the first special symbol variation processing ends. To do.

In this example, since the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) is performed. When the variable display of the special symbol is being displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol may result in a small hit and be controlled by the small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is before the small hit is released. (Determine whether or not the value corresponds to the processing to the small hit end processing), and if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the first special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the first special symbol variation processing. As a result, the value of the first special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop process unless the small hit game is in progress. By performing such control, the variation display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. It is controlled to do. Not limited to such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is interrupted (timer). It may be configured to suspend the update).

Further, for example, the small hit ending period as the small hit end processing period may be configured to be different depending on the game state. For example, if the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted in the normal state, the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes long, and the execution period and the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol become longer. If the difference becomes large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period by stopping the shaking of the decorative pattern, which gives the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable to make the small hit ending period shorter than the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the normal state, whereas the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, for example, in the first KT state, it is practically difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the small hit control, and no particular effect is performed. Therefore, the small hit ending period is shorter than in the second KT state. It may be configured to do so. On the other hand, in the second KT state, the game ball is easy to win in the small hit control, and the effect of emphasizing the small hit control is executed. Therefore, the small hit ending period may be longer than in the first KT state. .. In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, whereas the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

Further, regarding the small hit fanfare period as the small hit opening pretreatment period, the length of the period may be different depending on the game state, as in the above-mentioned small hit ending period.

The first special symbol stop process in step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “3”. In this first special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A stops the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). The process of making settings is included. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the setting process for starting the big hit game is performed. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", a process for starting the small hit game is performed. Then, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. .. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop process ends.

The process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process process described with reference to FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process process will be explained. Further, each random number value extracted by the first start winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in the second hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as hold information.

In this example, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. Therefore, for example, the transition to the second special symbol variation process is performed to change the second special symbol. When the display is in progress, a small hit may occur in the variable display of the first special symbol, and the game may be controlled by a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the first special figure process flag is before the small hit is released. (Determine whether or not the value corresponds to the processing to the small hit end processing), and if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the second special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the second special symbol variation processing. As a result, the value of the second special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop process unless the small hit game is in progress. By performing such control, the variation display of the second special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. It is controlled to do. Not limited to such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol is interrupted (timer It may be configured to suspend the update).

Regarding the small hit control based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the length of the small hit fanfare period and the small hit ending period may be different depending on the game state.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25C shown in FIG. 4 as the accessory control process process. In this accessory control process process, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S120 to S128 according to the value of the accessory control process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S120 to S128) of the accessory control process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The bonus control normal process in step S120 is executed when the value of the bonus control process flag is “0”. In this bonus control normal process, it is monitored whether or not the setting for starting the big hit game is made, and if the setting for starting the big hit game is made, the process for starting the big hit game is performed. , The value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "1".

The gate passage waiting process in step S121 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “1”. In this gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41. When the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41 is detected, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "2".

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S122 is executed when the accessory control process flag is “2”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for keeping the big winning opening in the open state and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S123 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “3”. This big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, and the like. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "4" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. , End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The jackpot release post-processing in step S124 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “4”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit execution number, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit execution number, the accessory control process The value of the flag is updated to "5". When the value of the accessory control process flag is updated, the processing after opening the jackpot ends.

The jackpot end processing in step S125 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “5”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control, KT control, and high-base control. When such a setting is made, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S126 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “6”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the special winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "7", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S127 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “7”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the special winning opening is opened and the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "8", and the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S128 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “8”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 7. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 7 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). In addition, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation in the decorative light emitting body such as the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED, and the driving of the movable body 32. Controls such as operation to operate various production devices are performed. In addition, the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices is determined, determined, set, and the like according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 7 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 8, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead advance notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead advance notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or, driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the LED control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of the prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature section 080IW)
Next, the feature unit 080IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the feature unit 080IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the feature unit 080IW includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state, and in this feature unit 080IW, the gaming state is set to a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). When it is controlled, when it is controlled to the first KT state (low probability / first KT state) with low probability, and when it is controlled to the first KT state (high probability / first KT state) with high probability. , High probability and may be controlled to the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

In the first KT state, as will be described later, a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in the open state, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long, and the small hit Even if the above occurs, there are very few cases where the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and is controlled to a high base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B becomes long. Further, in the second KT state of the KT state, as will be described later, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is moved to the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Easy to win. Specifically, in the second KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and is controlled to a low base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened.

In addition, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in this feature unit 080IW, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. Then, while the ratio of small hits is low when the first special symbol changes, the ratio of small hits is high when the second special symbol changes (however, it will be described later). (Except for the case of forced loss), the KT state is set to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated by mainly changing the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player.

The configuration for setting the KT state to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state is the same as in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes. By configuring the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to a certain time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state, and the KT state is set to the normal state. It may be in a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur.

Further, the feature unit 080IW is configured so that the time required from the game ball passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation position of the passing gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the nail group forming the flow path of the game ball. Although details will be described later, the feature unit 080IW has a configuration in which the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to the open state based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41, and the game ball passes in the first KT state described later. The time from passing through the gate 41 until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passing gate 41. Since it is shorter than 0.6 seconds, which is the time required for the game to be played, when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state when one game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the first KT state, the one The game ball can be directly entered into the variable winning ball device 6B.

(Big hit probability, small hit probability)
9-1 and 9-2 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the big hit probability and the small hit probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 9-1 shows the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. Further, FIG. 9-2 shows the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. In this example, it is configured so that it can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different), and when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to check the current setting value or change the setting value by executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process. As shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Not only when the setting can be changed in 6 steps, for example, the setting may be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or the setting may be changed in 7 or more steps.

First, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 9-1. In the example shown in FIG. 9-1 (A), in the non-probability state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "247/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-1 (B), in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the overall jackpot winning probability is 10 times higher than that in the non-probability state (low probability state). When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the case of the set value "6" has the highest jackpot probability "2470/65536". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A) and 9-1 (B), regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the non-probability changing state (low probability). The small hit probability is constant as "6298/65536" regardless of whether it is a state) or a probability variation state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is common to the non-probability change state and the probability change state. As shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A) and 9-1 (B), even when the jackpot probability is configured to be constant while the jackpot probability is made different according to the set value in this way, the missed probability is lost. Is different in the set values "1" to "6" so that the number of determination values for each set value is matched.

Next, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 9-2. In the example shown in FIG. 9-2 (A), in the non-probability state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "247/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-2 (B), in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the overall jackpot winning probability is 10 times higher than that in the non-probability state (low probability state). When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the case of the set value "6" has the highest jackpot probability "2470/65536". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9-2 (B), regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the non-probability state (low probability). The small hit probability is constant as "62986/65536" regardless of whether it is a state) or a probability variation state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is common to the non-probability change state and the probability change state. However, in this example, in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol (see FIG. 9-2), the small hit is compared with the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 9-1). The winning probability is about 10 times (that is, the number of judgment values for small hit determination when executing the variable display of the second special symbol is the small hit when executing the variable display of the first special symbol. More than the number of judgment values for judgment). As shown in FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9-2 (B), even when the jackpot probability is configured to be constant while the jackpot probability is made different according to the set value in this way, the missed probability is lost. Is different in the set values "1" to "6" so that the number of determination values for each set value is matched.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, the determination values corresponding to the deviations are included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values "1" to "6" (FIG. 9). As shown in -1 and FIG. 9-2, there is no set value at which the probability of loss is 0). Then, the determination value corresponding to the deviation differs depending on the set value (as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, depending on which of the set values "1" to "6". , The probability of loss is different).

In addition, not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, for example, there may be a case where the probability of loss is 0 (that is, a set value that does not include a determination value corresponding to loss). For example, at the set value "6" having the highest advantage (highest jackpot probability), the loss probability may be 0, and the determination value corresponding to the loss may not be included.

Further, not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, there may be a case where the small hit probability is 0 (that is, a judgment value that does not include the judgment value corresponding to the small hit). For example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol (FIG. 9-1), the small hit probability may be uniformly set to 0 so that the judgment value for the small hit is not included. Good.

In addition, in FIGS. 9-1 (A) and 9-2 and 9-2 (A) and 9-2 (B), the small hit probability is the same between the probabilistic state (high probability state) and the non-probability state (low probability state). Although the off-probability is different, in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the jackpot probability is higher than that in the non-probability state (low probability state), so the small hit probability is higher than in the non-probability state (low probability state). It may be lowered to match the probability of loss. Further, even if the set values are different in, for example, "1" and "2", the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched respectively. As a result, in a game machine in which the number of stages that can be substantially set is less than 6 or a game machine in which there is no difference in advantage due to the setting change function, a type of game machine having a setting change function in 6 stages and a hardware / software configuration. Can be standardized and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

(Big hit type judgment table)
9-3 (A) and 9-3 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is set to "normal jackpot", "first probability variation jackpot", "1st probability variation jackpot" based on the random number for hit type determination. It is a table referred to for determining either "the second probability variation jackpot" or "the third probability variation jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), in this feature unit 080IW, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", There is a 35% chance that it will be a "normal jackpot", a 30% chance that it will be a "first probability variation jackpot", a 30% chance that it will be a "second probability variation jackpot", and a 5% chance that it will be a "second probability variation jackpot". 3 Probability change jackpot "is decided. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), in this feature unit 080IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6". Is determined to be a "normal jackpot" with a 35% probability, a "first probability variation jackpot" with a 5% probability, a "second probability variation jackpot" with a 10% probability, and a 50% probability. It is decided as "the third probability change jackpot".

The "normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of four rounds and shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot gaming state. After shifting to the low probability / high base state, the low probability / high base state is maintained until the 50 fluctuation display is completed or the next big hit occurs. Further, when the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed, the state shifts to the low probability / low base state.

The "first probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of four rounds and shifts to a probability variation state (high probability state) after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In this case, high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) or high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) depending on the game state when the fluctuation display is stopped and the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. ). After shifting to the high-probability / high-base state, the high-probability / high-base state is maintained until the variation display of 50 or 100 times is completed or the next big hit occurs. Further, when the fluctuation display of 50 times or 100 times is completed, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state. Further, when the state shifts to the high probability / low base state, the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

The "second probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 10 rounds and shifts to a probability variation state (high probability state) after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In this case, high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) or high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) depending on the game state when the fluctuation display is stopped and the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. ). After shifting to the high-probability / high-base state, the high-probability / high-base state is maintained until 50 fluctuation displays are completed or the next big hit occurs. Further, when the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state. Further, when the state shifts to the high probability / low base state, the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

The "third probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 10 rounds and shifts to a probability variation state (high probability state) after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In this case, regardless of the gaming state when the variable display is stopped and the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the game state is shifted to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when the state shifts to the high probability / low base state, the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

In this example, the high probability / low base state (second KT state) is more advantageous than the high probability / high base state (first KT state) because it is easier for the game ball to win the special winning opening during the small hit game. Therefore, in this example, the "third probability variation jackpot" is the most advantageous jackpot type, the "second probability variation jackpot" is the next most advantageous jackpot type, and the "first probability variation jackpot" is the next most advantageous. It is a big hit type, and "normal big hit" is the most disadvantageous big hit type.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-3, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the selection probabilities of "normal jackpot", "first probability variation jackpot", and "second probability variation jackpot" are set. Since it is high, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed during the high probability / low base state (second KT state) and a big hit is obtained, the high probability / low base state (second KT state) is likely to end. On the other hand, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the selection probability of the "third probability variation jackpot" is high, so that the variation display of the second special symbol during the high probability / low base state (second KT state). When is executed and becomes a big hit, the high probability / low base state (second KT state) is likely to continue.

Further, in this example, in the normal symbol process process (step S26), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the variation display result of the normal symbol is a hit (per ordinary symbol), and based on the determination result, the normal symbol is displayed. The control to execute the variable display is performed, but in this example, 99/100 is uniformly performed regardless of whether or not it is in the probabilistic state, whether or not it is in the KT state, or whether or not it is in the high base state. It is decided to hit the normal symbol with the probability of. Further, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a high base flag indicating that the high base state is set is set, and if the high base flag is set (if the high base state is set), the variable winning ball device 6B Is controlled to open for a long period of 5.5 seconds, and if the high base flag is not set (if it is in a low base state), the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a short period of 0.2 seconds. Control.

(Variation pattern table)
9-4 to 9-6 are explanatory views showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in the feature portion 080IW. The EXT shown in FIGS. 9-4 to 9-6 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-4 to 9-6, nine types of first variable patterns # 01 to # 12 for the first special symbol and decorative symbol and the second variable pattern for the second special symbol and decorative symbol are used. 34 types of # 01 to # 34 are used. Hereinafter, for example, when the fluctuation pattern #n (n = 01 to 09 or 01 to 34) is used, it means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

When executing the variation display of the first special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the first special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 9-4 (A). The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 06.

In addition, if the 50th variation display (that is, the final variation in the low probability / 1st KT state) is executed after the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed. , The first special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 50th variation shown in FIG. 9-4 (B) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed as the 50th variation in the low probability / first KT state, any one of the first variation patterns # 07 to # 09. Will be decided. As shown in FIG. 9-5 (G), in the fluctuation display of the 50th fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is determined to be the first fluctuation patterns # 07 to # 09, which are relatively short at 5 seconds.

When executing the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, when it is a KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state) other than the final fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state. The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for KT other shown in FIG. 9-4 (C) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in other KT states, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 10 to # 12.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, when it is in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the second special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 9-5 (D) The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-5 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 03. Specifically, when it is determined to be out of alignment, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Further, when the small hit is determined, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when the jackpot is determined, the second variation pattern # 03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 5 minutes.

In this feature unit 080IW, even in the non-KT state, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, a situation occurs in which a certain amount of prize balls can be expected due to the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening. I will end up. Therefore, in this feature unit 080IW, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (D), even if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the fluctuation time is made extremely long and the execution frequency of the fluctuation display is executed. By reducing the number of small hits, the frequency of small hits is reduced, and the situation where a small hit is aimed at winning a prize ball is prevented even though the player is in a non-KT state. In this feature unit 080IW, the "small hit occurrence frequency" is, for example, the occurrence rate of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, small hits per unit time. The rate of occurrence of is higher than the normal state.

In this feature unit 080IW, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time even if it is a big hit. By making the time relatively long, 5 minutes, it is possible to prevent the act of aiming at the prize ball by unreasonably winning a prize in the special winning opening during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the digestion of the first reserved memory as compared with the case of a small hit, so the fluctuation time is configured to be shorter than in the case of a small hit. There is.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the low probability / first KT state, the number of fluctuations since the end of the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / first KT state. Select the variation pattern table according to. In this case, if the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation is executed, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 9-5 (E) is selected and fluctuates. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-5 (E), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 04 to # 06. Will be decided.

As shown in FIG. 9-5 (E), when it is determined that the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state is out of order, the second fluctuation pattern # 04 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds is used. It is determined. In addition, when it is determined that a small hit is the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 05 (opening of the second start winning opening), which is a relatively long fluctuation time of 7 seconds as a small hit. It is determined by the fluctuation pattern for preparation). In this feature unit 080IW, as described above, when controlled to the first KT state, the frequency of small hits increases, but by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning is actually achieved. The special winning opening in the ball device 17 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball is immediately available. If the device 17 is controlled to be in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win the special winning opening. Therefore, in this feature unit 080IW, by securing a fluctuation time of at least 7 seconds in the first fluctuation of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 can be used even before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 17 to the open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member fall, it is possible to win a prize in the special winning opening. It prevents the situation where a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the 1KT state. Further, when the big hit is determined as the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 06 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 minutes.

Further, if the fluctuation display of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations is executed after the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / first KT state is completed, the low probability shown in FIG. 9-5 (F) is executed. The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the probability / first KT and the 2nd to 49th fluctuations is selected and the fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-5 (F), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation patterns # 07 to # 13 It is decided to be either. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (F), when it is determined that the fluctuation time is out of the range of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, and the second fluctuation pattern # It may be determined to be 07 or the second fluctuation pattern # 08 of the shortened fluctuation whose fluctuation time is as short as 1 second. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state are out of range, the second fluctuation pattern # 12 with reach may be determined. Further, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, the second fluctuation pattern # 10 of the shortened fluctuation, and the fluctuation time is as short as 1 second. The second variation pattern # 11 of the shortened variation may be determined. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 12 with reach may be determined. The second variation patterns # 07 and # 10 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold memory is not stored, and the second variation patterns # 08 and # 11 store one or more second hold memories. It is a variation pattern that can be selected only when it is present. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased. Further, when the jackpot is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 13 with reach is determined.

In addition, if the 50th variation display (that is, the low probability / final variation in the 1st KT state) is executed after the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed. , The second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 50th variation shown in FIG. 9-5 (G) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-5 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 50th variation in the low probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 14 to # 16. Will be decided. As shown in FIG. 9-5 (G), in the variation display of the 50th variation in the low probability / first KT state, the shutter effect is executed in the image display device 5, and the variation time is relatively short at 5 seconds. 2 Fluctuation patterns # 14 to # 16 are determined.

In addition, in this feature unit 080IW, as shown in FIG. 9-4, when a big hit is obtained in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during other KT states, the first fluctuation pattern # with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds # It is configured to determine 10. This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is set to a long fluctuation time, Since the change of the second special symbol executed during the big hit change of the first special symbol is configured to be a forced loss, the forced loss occurs frequently even in the second KT state, and the player makes a small hit. You will not be able to receive any profit from this. Therefore, in this feature unit 080IW, by setting the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol to a short fluctuation time, the game shifts to the jackpot gaming state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol before the forced loss occurs frequently. It is configured.

In addition, unlike the present feature unit 080IW, even if the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is not forcibly missed (for example, the first). If the game machine has a configuration in which the second special symbol is forcibly removed when the second special symbol is changing when the special symbol jackpot symbol is stopped), the fluctuation time of the jackpot of the first special symbol in the KT state May be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a jackpot occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot is set to the same short fluctuation time as the outlier, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from small hits. Therefore, if the fluctuation time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, a sufficient time that a small hit can occur at least a plurality of times. (For example, 1 minute) is configured to be secured.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the first probability variation jackpot or the second probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is played. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since the end. In this case, if the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation is to be executed, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 9-6 (H) is selected and fluctuates. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-6 (H), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 17 to # 21. Will be decided.

As in the case of the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (H), the fluctuation time is also determined to be out of the first fluctuation in the high probability / first KT state. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 17 of the shortened fluctuation as short as 5 seconds. On the other hand, even when it is determined that the first variation in the high probability / first KT state is out of alignment, the second variation pattern # 18 with reach may be determined. Further, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the variation pattern for preparing to open the second starting winning opening (second variation pattern # 19) may be determined. On the other hand, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 20 with reach may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (H), when the jackpot is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 21 with reach is determined.

Further, in the case of executing the fluctuation display after the second fluctuation after the jackpot game based on the first probability variation jackpot or the second probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is executed, FIG. 9-6 The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the second and subsequent fluctuations shown in (I) is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 9-6 (I), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, any of the second fluctuation patterns # 22 to # 28 Is decided.

As in the case of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / 1st KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (I), when it is determined that the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / 1st KT state are out of order, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (I). The second fluctuation pattern # 22 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds and the second fluctuation pattern # 23 of the shortened fluctuation with a shorter fluctuation time of 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state are out of order, the second fluctuation pattern # 24 with reach may be determined. Further, when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is shortened to 5 seconds, the second fluctuation pattern # 25, and the fluctuation time is further shortened to 1 second. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 26 of the fluctuation. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 27 with reach may be determined. The second variation patterns # 22 and # 25 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold memory is not stored, and the second variation patterns # 23 and # 26 store one or more second hold memories. It is a variation pattern that can be selected only when it is present. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased. Further, when the jackpot is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 28 with reach is determined.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability / second KT state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for the high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 9-6 (J) is displayed. It is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-6 (J), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 29 to # 34. ..

As shown in FIG. 9-6 (J), when it is determined that the deviation is out of the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 29 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is determined. In some cases, the fluctuation time is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 30 of the normal fluctuation of 5 seconds. On the other hand, when it is determined to be out of the high probability / second KT state, it may be determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 31 with reach. Further, when the small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the fluctuation time is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 32 of the shortened fluctuation as short as 1.5 seconds, or the fluctuation time is usually 5 seconds. The second fluctuation pattern # 33 of the fluctuation may be determined. Further, when the jackpot is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 34 with reach is determined.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be described. FIG. 9-7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state. Further, FIG. 9-7 (1) shows the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state, respectively, and FIG. 9-7 (2) shows the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state, respectively. The opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 are shown.

First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 9-7 (1). As shown in FIG. 9-7 (1), when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 executes a variable display of the normal symbol. When it is determined to be a normal symbol hit, the hit symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and when it is determined to be out of order, the off symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. In this feature unit 080IW, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (1), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the missed symbol is 0.2 seconds. ing. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (1), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the time before the second start winning opening opening process is 0.1 seconds. After that, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball is won in the special winning opening. It will be in a possible state. However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side is as short as 0.8 seconds, whereas the variable winning ball device on the upstream side is The opening time of 6B is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is completed, the next variable winning ball device 6B can be opened in the next normal symbol. After a lapse of at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time of 0.1 seconds before opening the second start winning opening. Therefore, in the feature unit 080IW, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened.

Further, in the feature unit 080IW, in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. After 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening pre-opening processing time of 0.1 seconds, the game ball The time required from passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the state where the normal symbol is not changed until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. Since the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 to when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B is shorter than the time when the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is already open. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B when the state is controlled. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed is likely to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 9-7 (2). As shown in FIG. 9-7 (2), when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 executes a variable display of the normal symbol. When it is determined to be a normal symbol hit, the hit symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and when it is determined to be out of order, the off symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. In this feature unit 080IW, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1.0 second, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol and the missed symbol is 0.2 second. ing. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (2), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the time before the second start winning opening processing is 2.6 seconds. After that, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 0.2 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball is won in the special winning opening. It will be possible.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is as short as 0.2 seconds. Further, in the feature unit 080IW, in the second KT state, the interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened is at least 3.8 seconds (normal symbol variation time 1.0 second + symbol confirmation time 0). A relatively long period of .2 seconds + time before the opening process of the second start winning opening is 2.6 seconds) is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (2), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period) is long, so that it is compared with the first KT state. It is easy for the game ball to enter the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side, and it is easy for the game ball to win the special winning opening.

In the second KT state, a game ball is easily won in the special winning opening and a prize ball is easily obtained. Therefore, in this example, it is also called "small hit RUSH", and in the second KT state, "small hit RUSH". Character display such as "is displayed.

Further, in the feature unit 080IW, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. After the lapse of 3.8 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1.0 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time of 2.6 seconds before opening the second start winning opening, the game ball The time required from passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state in the state where the normal symbol is not changed is longer. Since it is longer than the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 until the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B before being controlled by. Therefore, in the second KT state, it is difficult for the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

In the feature unit 080IW, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbol and opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B is the normal symbol process process by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103). This is done by executing (see step S26). Further, in the normal symbol process processing of step S26, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the game state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), and whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state, or a second KT state. Regardless of whether or not there is a big hit game state, it is determined whether or not to make a normal hit with the same probability (for example, 10% or 100%).

In this feature unit 080IW, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same for each of 0.2 seconds in the first KT state and the second KT state, and the time before the opening processing of the second start winning opening is the second. The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B is changed by shortening it to 0.1 seconds in the 1KT state and lengthening it to 2.6 seconds in the second KT state has been shown, but only in such a mode. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be different by making the fluctuation time and the symbol determination time different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after the variable winning ball device 6B is closed can be controlled, and the time after the second starting winning opening opening process differs between the first KT state and the second KT state. The closed period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be different depending on the setting. In particular, if the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state is configured to have a shorter closing period (interval period) by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress winning of the special winning opening in the first KT state. ..

As will be described later, in this feature unit 080IW, in the first KT state, by setting a high base flag indicating that the high base state is set, the high base state is controlled, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (1). As described above, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled so that the opening time is long. Further, in the second KT state, by controlling to the low base state without setting the high base flag, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (2), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be short. ing.

For example, a special flag (opening extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, it is as shown in FIG. 9-7 (1). The variable winning ball device 6B is controlled by the first opening pattern (long opening) that opens for a long time, and if the special flag is not set, the variable winning ball device 6B shown in FIG. 9-7 (2) is opened for a short time. It may be configured to control with a two-open pattern (short open). That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the special flag may not be set in other states including the big hit game state.

Further, even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be shortened when the final variation display in the low probability / first KT state is executed. For example, out of the 50 times shortened fluctuation period of the special symbol in the low probability / first KT state, the above-mentioned special flag may be deleted in response to the 49th stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the variable winning ball device 6B being long open when performing a left-handed notification after the end of the low probability / first KT state. be able to.

In addition, as described above, when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured by using the flag (special flag) for opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B, the flag for shortening the variation display of the special symbol is further used. The variation display of the special symbol may be controlled. In this case, the special flag and the flag for shortening variation may be managed and controlled separately.

Further, the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be short-opened in the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to have a high opening probability in a low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. It is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 6B from winning a prize, and it is possible to prevent a right-handed operation from being performed during a low probability / non-KT state.

In this feature unit 080IW, as shown in FIG. 9-7, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable winning ball is in the state where the normal symbol is stopped changing and there is no hold memory of the normal symbol. This is because the device 6B is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the second special symbol aiming at the fluctuation stop timing (in the case of a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the passing gate By the time the game ball that has passed through 41 reaches the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, the variable winning ball device 6B does not open, and the special winning opening can be won). On the other hand, in this feature unit 080IW, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 6B. Is set to start, so that it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

(Direction control command)
9-8 and 9-9 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIG. 9-8, the commands 8000 (H) to 800C (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H) are decorations that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. This is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of a symbol. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 800C (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H), the image display device 5 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Control.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is to be missed. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (normal jackpot designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is a normal jackpot. Command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (first probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the first probability variation jackpot. Is. The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the second probability variation jackpot (display result 4 designation command (second probability variation jackpot designation command)). Is. The command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (third probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the third probability variation jackpot. Is. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (small hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 6 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this feature unit 080IW, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a display result specification command immediately before the variation pattern command, so that the display result specification command received by the effect control CPU 120 immediately before the first variation pattern command is Since it can be determined that the display result specification command is for the first special symbol, and the display result specification command received immediately before the second variation pattern command is a display result specification command for the second special symbol, the display result is displayed. The designation command can be used for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the display result designation command for the first special symbol and the display result designation command for the second special symbol may be separated.

Further, the game control microcomputer 100 does not send a display result designation command, but a variation pattern corresponding to each of normal jackpot / first probability variable jackpot / second probability variable jackpot / third probability variable jackpot / small hit / miss. A command may be determined, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

The command 9C00 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) for designating that the right-handed display 26 has finished lighting. The command 9C01 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) for designating that the right-handed display 26 has started lighting.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

The command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped. The command A003 (H) is an effect control command (second forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped.

The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the jackpot game. B001 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during the opening of the big winning opening) that specifies the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. A command indicating the number of first reserved storages may be transmitted as the first valid start prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved storage number may be transmitted as the second valid start winning designation command. However, this feature unit 080IW Then, the first effective start prize designation command and the second valid start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

The command C801 (H) is an effect control command (gate passage designation command) for designating that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

The command D000 (H) is an effect control command (first customer) that specifies that it is in the first customer waiting state (the state in which the first special symbol is not changed and the first hold memory is not stored). Wait demo display specification command). The command D001 (H) is an effect control command (second customer) that specifies that it is in the second customer waiting state (the state in which the second special symbol is not changed and the second hold memory is not stored). Wait demo display specification command). The first customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. Further, the second customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / non-KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability / non-KT state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / first KT state. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / second KT state.

The command E1XX (H) is an effect control command (setting value command) for designating the currently set setting value. A set value is set in "XX". For example, when the set value is set to "1", the command E101 (H) is transmitted as the set value command. Further, for example, when the set value is set to "6", the command E106 (H) is transmitted as the set value command.

When the effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 9-8 and 9-9, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice control board 13. It should be noted that the effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 9-8 and 9-9 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating the game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

(1st special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 9-10 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal processing is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A. The case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A is a state in which the first special symbol display device 4A does not display the variation of the first special symbol.

In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 080IWS50A). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step 080IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first hold storage counter is confirmed. If the first hold storage number is 0, the first customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS52A).

If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, and the RAM 102. (Step 080IWS53A), decrement the value of the first reserved storage number by 1 (subtract the count value of the 1st reserved storage number counter by 1), and shift the contents of each storage area. (Step 080IWS54A). That is, each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the first reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order of the first reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The order of extraction is also identifiable and saved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 080IWS55A). In this example, by executing the process of step 080IWS55A, the setting value command is transmitted every time the fluctuation display is started. The setting value command is also sent when is executed.

The timing of sending the setting value command is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, the setting value command is configured to be transmitted at each end of the fluctuation display, or the setting value command is transmitted during the fluctuation display. It may be configured to do so.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS56A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined that the state is low probability / non-KT, and the low probability / non-KT background specification command is executed. The probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on. In some cases, it is determined that the state is low probability / 1st KT, and the low probability / 1st KT background specification command is executed. If the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is on, the command is high probability / 1st KT state. If the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off, the high probability / second KT state is determined and the high accuracy / second KT background specification command is executed. Send.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in progress (step 080IWS57A). Specifically, when the second jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress. When it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step 080IWS67A without performing the processing after step 080IWS58A. As a result, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly removing the material is not limited to the above. For example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing in step 080IWS57A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of order as a random number for hit determination is performed, and by shifting to step 080IWS59A, at the time of starting winning. Regardless of which hit determination random number has been acquired, it may be forcibly removed.

Further, for example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing in step 080IWS57A, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as a random number for hit determination without performing the processing of steps 080IWS58A to S63A. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the first random number storage buffer (step 080IWS58A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 080IWS59A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for hit determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step 080IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 080IWS61A). .. Then, based on the random number for determining the hit type, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a normal jackpot, a first probability variation jackpot, a second probability variation jackpot, or a third probability variation jackpot (step 080IWS62A), and the jackpot type is stored (step 080IWS62A). Step 080IWS63A) and step 080IWS67A.

If no big hit is made in step 080IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 080IWS64A). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a small hit is determined when a hit determination random number (a random number for small hit determination may be used) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 080IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first small hit flag indicating that the small hit will be made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 080IWS65A). Step 080IWS66A). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS67A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state is "0" (step 080IWS67A), and if it is "0", step 080IWS74A. Move to. When the value of the high base count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the value of the high base count counter by "1" (step 080IWS68A). It is determined whether or not the result is "0" (step 080IWS69A). If the value of the high base count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 080IWS74A. When the value of the high base number counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that the high base state is in effect (step 080IWS70A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 080IWS71A). If the probability change flag is set (that is, if it is in the probability change state), the process proceeds to step 080IWS74A. If the probability change flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probability change state), the game control microcomputer 100 resets the special figure time reduction flag indicating that the special symbol variation display is being shortened (step 080IWS72A). ). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 is extended until the end of the fluctuation (step 080IWS73A). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS74A.

In this feature unit 080IW, as will be described later, the high base flag is set and the number of executions of the fluctuation display in the high base state is managed with a low probability / high base state at the end of the big hit game based on the normal big hit ( High probability / high base state (high probability / 1st KT) when controlled to low probability / 1st KT state and 50 times of fluctuation display is executed, and at the end of big hit game based on 1st probability variation jackpot or 2nd probability variation jackpot. This is the case where the variable display is executed 50 times or 100 times under the control of the state). In the case of the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), when the 50th variation display is started, it is determined as Y in steps 080IWS69A and S69B and N in steps 080IWS71A and S71B. Then, the high base flag is reset in steps 080IWS70A and S70B, and the special time saving flag is also reset in steps 080IWS72A and S72B, resulting in a transition to a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)). .. On the other hand, in the case of the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), when the 50th or 100th variation display is started, it is determined as Y in steps 080IWS69A and S69B, and step 080IWS71A, It is determined as Y in S71B, the high base flag is reset in steps 080IWS70A and S70B, and the high probability / low base state (second KT state) is entered.

The lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is for continuing the right-handed notification and continuing the right-handed state, and although the high base state has ended as the game state, the fluctuation reduction common to the first KT state is shortened. It is a flag for making the production background common to the first KT state while keeping the state.

Then, in step 080IWS74A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step 080IWS74A). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step 080IWS74A is confirmed.

In step 080IWS59A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

(1st fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 9-11 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is first set with a special figure time reduction flag or a lighting extension flag indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is being shortened. It is confirmed whether or not it has been performed (step 080IWS1700A). In this example, it is more advantageous to execute the variation display of the second special symbol by setting the special symbol time reduction flag and the lighting extension flag and performing the shortening control of the variation display of the special symbol (). (See FIGS. 9-4 to 9-6), since a small hit is likely to occur, the state is controlled to the KT state. If neither the special figure time reduction flag nor the lighting extension flag is set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern as shown in FIG. 9-4. The first special symbol variation pattern table for non-KT shown in (A) is selected (step 080IWS1701A).

If the special figure time reduction flag or the lighting extension flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the first variation pattern table for KT as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. A variable pattern table for a special symbol is selected (step 080IWS1702A). In step 080IWS1702A, the CPU 103 is shown in FIG. 9-4 (B) if the lighting extension flag is set (ie, if the last variation display in the low probability / first KT state is executed). Select the 1st special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / 1st KT and 50th variation shown. On the other hand, if the special symbol time reduction flag is set, the others shown in FIG. 9-4 (C). The first special symbol variation pattern table for KT is selected.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 is based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 080IWS1701A and S1702A and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. It is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 9-4 is used (step 080IWS1703A). In this example, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern. Further, after the fluctuation time is determined, the fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1704A).

Further, when the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step 080IWS1703A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first fluctuation time timer and the fluctuation time. (Step 080IWS1705A), and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is started (step 080IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 080IWS1707A).

(1st special symbol change processing)
FIG. 9-12 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 080IWS1120A). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not yet been transmitted, and the jackpot type. Based on the determination result, control is performed to transmit one of the display result designation commands to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1121A).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first fluctuation time timer (step 080IWS1122A), and when the first fluctuation time timer times out (step 080IWS1123A), controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1122A). Step 080IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 080IWS1135A).

When the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is in progress (step 080IWS1125A). Whether or not the variation of the second special symbol is being displayed is checked, for example, whether or not the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to processing other than the second special symbol normal processing. It can be judged by. If the variation of the second special symbol is being displayed, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 080IWS1126A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 080IWS1127A). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 080IWS1128A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1129A).

When it is determined as Y in step 080IWS1125A and Y is determined in step 080IWS1126A, the variation display of the first special symbol is started as the final variation in the low probability / high base state (first KT state), and then the variation display is ended. This is the case where the variable display of the second special symbol has been started before. In this case, in this example, by executing the processes of steps 080IWS1127A to S1129A, the variation display of the first special symbol is started as the final variation in the low probability / high base state (first KT state), and then the variation display is performed. If the variation display of the second special symbol is started before the end of, the lighting extension flag is reset at the timing of the start of the variation display of the second special symbol to end the low probability / high base state. However, it is configured to shift to a low probability / low base state (normal state).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 080IWS1130A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 080IWS1131A). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second small hit flag indicating that the small hit is obtained is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol. If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B, the process ends as it is.

If the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit (step 080IWS1132A). .. It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined by checking, for example, whether or not the first big hit flag is set. If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit type is a probabilistic big hit (first probable big hit to third probable big hit) (step 080IWS1133A). ). Whether or not it is a probability variation jackpot (first probability variation jackpot to third probability variation jackpot) can be determined by checking, for example, the jackpot type stored in step 080IWS63A. If it is a probability variation jackpot (first probability variation jackpot to third probability variation jackpot), the process is terminated as it is.

When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (Y of step 080IWS1130A), or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y of step 080IWS1131A), the probability variation jackpot (first probability variation jackpot to the first) When the variation display of the first special symbol (that is, the normal jackpot) is being executed (Y in step 080IWS1132A, N in step 080IWS1133A), the CPU 103 is sent to the effect control CPU 120. 1 Control is performed to send a forced symbol confirmation designation command (step 080IWS1134A). In this case, if the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 080IWS1135A).

By executing the processes of steps 080IWS1130A to S1134A, in this feature unit 080IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol. In some cases, when the variable display of the first special symbol, which is usually a big hit, is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are hit at the same time. And small hits do not occur. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, if the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly missed, the decorative symbol is changed based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 080IWS1134A. As a display result, control is performed so that the out-of-order symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed.

In this example, the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol which is the probability variation big hit is being executed. In some cases, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y in step 080IWS1133A), but in this case, the accessory control is based on the fact that the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step S126), and the game shifts to the small hit game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, it is determined as N in step 080IWS1120A, the processing of steps 080IWS1121A to S1135A is skipped, and the first fluctuation time timer of step 080IWS1122A is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a probability variation big hit, is being executed, the first variation time timer is during the small hit game. The update of is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being performed. If there is, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see N in step 080IWS1132A). Therefore, even when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being executed, the first variation is performed during the small hit game. When the update of the time timer is interrupted and the variation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed and the small hit game is completed, the update of the first variation time timer is restarted.

(1st special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 9-13 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 080IWS2010A). If the probability change flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a probability change storage flag indicating that the gaming state at the end of the variation display is the probability change state (step 080IWS2011A). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the high base flag or the lighting extension flag is set (step 080IWS2012A). If the high base flag or the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the high base storage flag indicating that the gaming state at the end of the variation display is the high base state (step 080IWS2013A).

By executing the processes of steps 080IWS2010A to S2013A, in this example, it is once recorded that the gaming state at the end of the variation display is the probability change state or the high base state.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 080IWS2014A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 080IWS2015A). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 080IWS2016A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS2017A).

In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, the person who performs the right-handed operation when the game state is controlled to the KT state. Is advantageous for the player, and the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on. Therefore, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is lit during the low probability / first KT state, but by executing the processes of steps 080IWS67A to S73A, the first special symbol is displayed as the 50th variation display. It is determined that the low probability / first KT state is terminated when the variation display of the first special symbol is terminated, and the processing of steps 080IWS2014A to S2017A is executed, so that the low probability / first when the variation display of the first special symbol is terminated. The right-handed display 26 is turned off while the 1KT state is terminated and the normal state (non-KT state) is entered. However, as already described, by executing the processes of steps 080IWS1125A to S1129A, after starting the variation display of the first special symbol as the final variation in the low probability / first KT state, and before ending the variation display. When the variation display of the second special symbol is started, the low probability / high base state is terminated at the timing of the start of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the low probability / low base state (normal state). ).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 080IWS2018A). In this case, if the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 080IWS1134A of the first special symbol variation processing, it is forced as a stop symbol of the first special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of the variation. The out-of-target design is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step 080IWS2019A). When the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot start flag indicating that the jackpot is started (step 080IWS2020A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first jackpot flag (step 080IWS2021A).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 080IWS2022A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS2023A). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2032A.

By executing the processes of steps 080IWS2022A and S2023A, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to be lit when a big hit is made in the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on.

In this example, after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the jackpot game is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. Therefore, right-handed at the timing when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41. The display 26 may be configured to start lighting.

If the first jackpot flag is not set (N in step 080IWS2019A), the CPU 103 resets the probability variation storage flag and the high base storage flag if it is set (step 080IWS20204A). In this example, the probability variation memory flag and the high base memory flag are set by executing the processes of steps 080IWS2010A to S2013A, and it is once recorded that the gaming state at the end of the variation display was the probability variation state or the high base state. However, in the case of deriving and displaying the out-of-order symbol or the small hit symbol, the probability variation storage flag and the high-base storage flag are reset by executing the process of step 080IWS2024A.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first small hit flag is set (step 080IWS2025A). When the first small hit flag is set, control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS2026A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first small hit flag (step 080IWS2027A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step 080IWS2031A). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2032A.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step 080IWS2032A).

In this example, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol, the right-handed notification that urges the player to launch the game ball to the right of the game area can be executed. There is. In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol, a launch promotion notification that urges the player to launch the game ball aiming at the passing gate 41 can be executed as a right-handed notification. You may be.

In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, the right-handed notification or launch promotion notification is not executed, and when the game ball wins the first start winning opening in that state, the right-handed notification or launch promotion notification is executed. (In this case, since the gate is waiting to pass through, even if the game ball wins in the first start winning opening, the variation display of the first special symbol is not started immediately, and the first hold memory is set). It may be configured as.

On the contrary, when the passage of the game ball at the passing gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is low (for example, low volume sound output or small screen display). Therefore, the player may be configured to perform a left-handed notification prompting the player to launch and operate the game ball to the left of the game area. On the other hand, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is high (for example, loud sound output or It may be configured to perform left-handed notification by (large screen display). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the launch. In particular, with the above configuration, a player who accidentally launches a game ball to the right of the game area is given a slight left-handed notification in a mode in which the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is low. , The player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation may be configured to perform the left-handed notification in a manner in which the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to urge the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation to return to the left-handed operation from the clerk of the game store.

Further, in the above case, the left-handed notification may be performed when the number of detected game balls at the passing gate 41, the second starting winning opening, and the special winning opening reaches a certain number. Further, when the passing gate 41 detects a game ball a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), a left-handed notification is given, and the second start winning opening and the special winning opening are more than a predetermined number. When a small number (for example, one) or more of game balls are detected, left-handed notification may be performed.

In this feature unit 080IW, the demo display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied, but when the demo display is performed in the normal state, the passage gate 41, the second start winning opening, or the special winning opening is displayed. When the winning of the game ball is detected, the execution of the demo display that has been executed may be terminated and the left-handed notification may be given.

(2nd special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 9-14 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal processing in the second special symbol process processing. The state in which the second special symbol normal processing is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing. In addition, when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, there is a state in which the second special symbol display device 4B does not display the variation of the second special symbol.

In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 080IWS50B). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step 080IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage counter is confirmed. If the second hold storage number is 0, the second customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS52B).

If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, and the RAM 102. In addition to storing in the second random number buffer area of (step 080IWS53B), the value of the second reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step 080IWS54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the second reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order of the second reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 080IWS55B). In this example, by executing the process of step 080IWS55B, the setting value command is transmitted every time the fluctuation display is started, but the setting change process (process of changing the set value) when the power is turned on. The setting value command is also sent when is executed.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS56B). The specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step 080IWS56A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is in progress (step 080IWS57B). Specifically, when the first jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress. When it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step 080IWS67B without performing the processing after step 080IWS58B. As a result, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly removing the material is not limited to the above. For example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step 080IWS57B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of order as a random number for hit determination is performed, and by shifting to step 080IWS59B, at the time of starting winning, It may be forcibly removed regardless of whether the random number for hit determination has been acquired.

Further, for example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step 080IWS57B, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as a random number for hit determination without performing the processing of steps 080IWS58B to S63B. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the second random number storage buffer (step 080IWS58B) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 080IWS59B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for hit determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step 080IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 080IWS61B). .. Then, based on the random number for determining the hit type, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a normal jackpot, a first probability variation jackpot, a second probability variation jackpot, or a third probability variation jackpot (step 080IWS62B), and the jackpot type is stored (step 080IWS62B). Step 080IWS63B) and step 080IWS67B.

If the big hit is not made in step 080IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 080IWS64B). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a small hit is determined when a hit determination random number (a random number for small hit determination may be used) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 080IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that the small hit will be made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 080IWS65B). Step 080IWS66B). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS67B.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step 080IWS67B), and if it is "0", the process proceeds to step 080IWS74B. When the value of the high base count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the value of the high base count counter by "1" (step 080IWS68B). It is determined whether or not the result is "0" (step 080IWS69B). If the value of the high base count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 080IWS74B. When the value of the high base number counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that the high base state is in effect (step 080IWS70B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 080IWS71B). If the probability change flag is set (that is, if it is in the probability change state), the process proceeds to step 080IWS74B. If the probability change flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probability change state), the game control microcomputer 100 resets the special figure time reduction flag indicating that the special symbol variation display is being shortened (step 080IWS72B). ). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step 080IWS73B). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS74B.

Then, in step 080IWS74B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern setting process (step 080IWS74B). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step 080IWS74B is confirmed.

In step 080IWS59B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) shown in FIGS. 9-11. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 9-11, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process is explained. However, in the second variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first performs the same process as in step 080IWS1700A, and confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag or the lighting extension flag is set. If neither the special figure time reduction flag nor the lighting extension flag is set (that is, unless it is in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses FIG. 9- as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. The second special symbol variation pattern table for non-KT shown in 5 (D) is selected. If the special figure time reduction flag or the lighting extension flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the probability variation flag and the high base flag are set, and the number of fluctuations. Correspondingly, as the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern, any of the fluctuation pattern tables for the second special symbol for KT shown in FIGS. 9-5 (E) to 9-6 (J) is selected. .. For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability / first KT state), the first variation is the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-5 (E). Select, and if it is the 2nd to 49th variation, select the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-5 (F), and if it is the 50th variation, select the second variation shown in FIG. 9-5 (G). Select the variable pattern table for special symbols. Further, for example, if both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (high probability / first KT state), the first variation is the variation for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-6 (H). The pattern table is selected, and if it is the second variation or later, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-6 (I) is selected. Further, for example, if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off (in the high probability / second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-6 (J) is selected. The CPU 103 selects the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 50th variation shown in FIG. 9-5 (G) based on the lighting extension flag being set. You may do so.

(2nd special symbol change processing)
FIG. 9-15 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 080IWS1120B). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not yet been transmitted, and the jackpot type. Based on the determination result, control is performed to transmit one of the display result designation commands to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1121B).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second fluctuation time timer (step 080IWS1122B), and when the second fluctuation time timer times out (step 080IWS1123B), controls to transmit the second symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1122B). Step 080IWS1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 080IWS1135B).

When the second fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is in progress (step 080IWS1125B). Whether or not the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner is confirmed by, for example, whether or not the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to processing other than the first special symbol normal processing. It can be judged by. If the variation of the first special symbol is being displayed, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 080IWS1126B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 080IWS1127B). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 080IWS1128B), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1129B).

When it is determined as Y in step 080IWS1125B and Y is determined in step 080IWS1126B, the variation display of the second special symbol is started as the final variation in the low probability / high base state (first KT state), and then the variation display is ended. This is the case where the variable display of the first special symbol has been started before. In this case, in this example, by executing the processes of steps 080IWS1127B to S1129B, the variation display of the second special symbol is started as the final variation in the low probability / high base state (first KT state), and then the variation display is performed. If the variation display of the first special symbol is started before the end of, the lighting extension flag is reset at the timing of the start of the variation display of the first special symbol to end the low probability / high base state. However, it is configured to shift to a low probability / low base state (normal state).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (step 080IWS1130B). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (step 080IWS1131B). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not the first small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol. If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the process ends as it is.

If the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit (step 080IWS1132B). .. It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined by checking, for example, whether or not the second big hit flag is set. If the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit type is a probability variation jackpot (first probability variation jackpot to third probability variation jackpot) (step 080IWS1133B). ). Whether or not it is a probability variation jackpot (first probability variation jackpot to third probability variation jackpot) can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step 080IWS63B. If it is a probability variation jackpot (first probability variation jackpot to third probability variation jackpot), the process is terminated as it is.

When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (Y in step 080IWS1130B), or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 080IWS1131B), the probability variation jackpot (first probability variation jackpot to first) When the variation display of the second special symbol (that is, the normal jackpot) is being executed (Y in step 080IWS1132B, N in step 080IWS1133B), the CPU 103 is sent to the effect control CPU 120. 2 Control is performed to send a forced symbol confirmation designation command (step 080IWS1134B). In this case, if the second big hit flag or the second small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the second big hit flag or the second small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 080IWS1135B).

By executing the processes of steps 080IWS1130B to S1134B, in this feature unit 080IW, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol. In some cases, when the variable display of the second special symbol, which is usually a big hit, is being executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are hit at the same time. And small hits do not occur. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, if the change display of the second special symbol is forcibly missed, the decorative symbol is changed based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 080IWS1134B. As a display result, control is performed so that the out-of-order symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed.

In this example, the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol, which is a probability variation big hit, is being executed. In some cases, the second special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y in step 080IWS1133B), but in this case, the accessory control is based on the fact that the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step S126), and the game shifts to the small hit game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, it is determined as N in step 080IWS1120B, the processing of steps 080IWS1121B to S1135B is skipped, and the second variable time timer of step 080IWS1122B is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol, which is a probability variation big hit, is being executed, the second variation time timer is during the small hit game. The update of the second special symbol is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variation time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being performed. If there is, the second special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see N in step 080IWS1132B). Therefore, even when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being executed, the second variation is performed during the small hit game. The update of the time timer is interrupted, the variation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small hit game is completed, the update of the second variation time timer is restarted.

By configuring as described above, in the normal state after the end of the first KT state (after the end of the reduced working hours state), the remaining second hold memory can be digested, and a big hit occurs at an unintended timing when the player is absent. Can be suppressed.

Further, a variable winning ball device for the first special symbol is provided below the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning opening), and a winning ball device for the second special symbol is provided on the right side of the game area. In a gaming machine configured to provide a starting winning opening, which is not a variable winning ball device, and to shift to a normal state via a time saving state of the first special symbol after the end of the second KT state (small hit RUSH). , As described above, the configuration in which the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed may be applied. In this case, as the fluctuation efficiency of the first special symbol increases, the frequency of small hits based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol also increases, but the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is forcibly missed accordingly. By increasing the frequency of this, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol based on the second hold memory in the normal state, and further suppress the occurrence of the jackpot at the unintended timing when the player is absent. Can be done.

(2nd special symbol stop processing)
9-16 and 9-17 are flowcharts showing the second special symbol stop processing. In the second special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 080IWS2010B). If the probability change flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the probability change storage flag (step 080IWS2011B). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the high base flag or the lighting extension flag is set (step 080IWS2012B). If the high base flag or the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the high base storage flag (step 080IWS2013B).

By executing the processes of steps 080IWS2010B to S2013B, in this example, it is once recorded that the gaming state at the end of the variation display is the probability change state or the high base state.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 080IWS2014B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 080IWS2015B). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 080IWS2016B), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS2017B).

In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, the person who performs the right-handed operation when the game state is controlled to the KT state. Is advantageous for the player, and the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on. Therefore, in this example, the right-handed indicator 26 is lit during the low probability / first KT state, but by executing the processes of steps 080IWS67B to S73B, the second special symbol is displayed as the 50th variation display. It is determined that the low probability / first KT state is terminated when the variation display of the second special symbol is terminated, and the processing of steps 080IWS2014B to S2017B is executed, so that the low probability / first when the variation display of the second special symbol is terminated. The right-handed display 26 is turned off while the 1KT state is terminated and the normal state (non-KT state) is entered. However, as described above, after the processing of steps 080IWS1125B to S1129B is executed, the variation display of the second special symbol is started as the final variation in the low probability / first KT state, and before the variation display is finished. When the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the low probability / high base state is terminated at the timing of the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, and the low probability / low base state (normal state) is started. ).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 080IWS2018B). In this case, if the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 080IWS1134B of the second special symbol variation processing, it is forced as a stop symbol of the second special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of the variation. The out-of-target design is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second jackpot flag is set (step 080IWS2019B). When the second jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot start flag (step 080IWS2020B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second jackpot flag (step 080IWS2021B).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 080IWS2022B), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS2023B). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2032B.

By executing the processing of step 080IWS2022B and S2023B, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to be lit when a big hit is made in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on.

If the second jackpot flag is not set (N in step 080IWS2019B), the CPU 103 resets the probability variation storage flag and the high-base storage flag if it is set (step 080IWS20204B). In this example, the probability variation memory flag and the high base memory flag are set by executing the processes of steps 080IWS2010B to S2013B, and it is once recorded that the gaming state at the end of the variation display was the probability variation state or the high base state. However, in the case of deriving and displaying the out-of-order symbol or the small hit symbol, the probability variation storage flag and the high-base storage flag are reset by executing the process of step 080IWS2024B.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small hit flag is set (step 080IWS2025B). When the second small hit flag is set, control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS2026B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second small hit flag (step 080IWS2027B).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 080IWS2028B). If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 080IWS2029B), and is right with respect to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed to send a lighting start designation command (step 080IWS2030B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step 080IWS2031B). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2032B.

By executing the processing of step 080IWS2029B and S2030B, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to be lit when a small hit is made in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is better for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the small hit game. It is advantageous, and the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

However, in this example, even if a small hit is made in the variation display of the second special symbol, the right-handed display 26 should already be lit when the KT state is in effect. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination process of step 080IWS2028B, if a small hit occurs in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the KT state, the right-handed display 26 is started to light in duplicate. The process of sending a right-handed lighting start specification command is not performed.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step 080IWS2032B).

(Characteristic control normal processing)
FIG. 9-18 is a flowchart showing a bonus control normal process (step S120) in the bonus control process process. In the accessory control normal process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the jackpot start flag is set (step 080IWS2101). If the jackpot start flag is not set, the process ends as it is.

If the jackpot start flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot start flag (step 080IWS2102). Next, the CPU 103 sets the timer before opening the big winning opening (step 080IWS2103), sets the opening pattern data for round 1 according to the big hit type (step 080IWS2104), and sets the round number counter indicating the number of big hit rounds to "1". "(Step 080IWS2105).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the gate passage waiting process (step 080IWS2106).

(Waiting for gate passage)
FIG. 9-19 is a flowchart showing a gate passage waiting process (step S121) in the accessory control process process. In the gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has been input (step 080IWS2501). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has not been input, the process ends as it is. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag, the high base flag, and the special time reduction flag if set, and clears the value of the high base count counter to 0 ( Step 080IWS2502). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (step 080IWS2503), and sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step 080IWS2504).

In this feature unit 080IW, the jackpot game is not started as soon as the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the second special symbol by executing the gate passage waiting process, but the passage gate 41 is played. It is configured to shift to the jackpot game on condition that the ball has passed and is detected by the gate switch 21.

(Big hit end processing)
9-20 and 9-21 are flowcharts showing the jackpot end processing (step S125) in the accessory control process processing. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step 080IWS2200), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, proceeds to step 080IWS2202. When the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 corresponds to the display time corresponding to the time when the jackpot end display is performed on the image display device 5 (big hit end display time) on the jackpot end display timer. A value is set (step 080IWS2201), and the process ends.

In step 080IWS2202, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 080IWS2202). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 080IWS2203). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 080IWS2203), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a normal jackpot (step 080IWS2204). Whether or not it is a normal jackpot can be determined by checking, for example, the jackpot type stored in step 080IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing or step 080IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a normal big hit, the CPU 103 sets the special figure time reduction flag and shifts to the KT state (step 080IWS2205), and sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 080IWS2206). Further, the CPU 103 sets "50" in the high base number counter (step 080IWS2207). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2228. Therefore, in the case of a normal big hit, it is controlled to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state).

If it is not a normal jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot completed this time is the first probability variation jackpot (step 080IWS2208). Whether or not it is the first probability variation jackpot can be determined by checking, for example, the jackpot type stored in step 080IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing or step 080IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is the first probability change jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the probability change flag and shifts to the probability change state (step 080IWS2209), and sets the special figure time reduction flag and shifts to the KT state (step 080IWS2210).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation storage flag is set (step 080IWS2211). If the probability variation storage flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the high base storage flag is set (step 080IWS2212). If the high base storage flag is not set (N in step 080IWS2212), that is, if the probability / low base state is obtained when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the high base flag is set to shift to the high base state. Along with (step 080IWS2213), "100" is set in the high base number counter (step 080IWS2214). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2228. Therefore, if the first probability variation jackpot occurs when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the low probability / low base state, it is controlled to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and then. When the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed, the control is performed from a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state).

If the high base storage flag is set (Y in step 080IWS2212), that is, if the probability / high base state is set when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the high base flag is set to shift to the high base state. Along with (step 080IWS2215), "50" is set in the high base count counter (step 080IWS2216). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2228. Therefore, if the first probability variation jackpot occurs when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the low probability / high base state, it is controlled to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and then. When the variation display of 50 times is completed, the control is performed from the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state).

If the probability variation storage flag is set (Y in step 080IWS2211), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the high base storage flag is set (step 080IWS2217). If the high base storage flag is set (Y in step 080IWS2217), that is, if the probability / high base state is high when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the high base flag is set to shift to the high base state. Along with (step 080IWS2218), "50" is set in the high base count counter (step 080IWS2219). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2228. Therefore, if the first probability variation jackpot occurs when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the high probability / high base state, it is controlled to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and then. When the variation display of 50 times is completed, the control is performed from the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state).

On the other hand, if the high base storage flag is not set (N in step 080IWS2217), that is, if the high probability / low base state is obtained when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the process directly proceeds to step 080IWS2228. Therefore, if the first probability variation jackpot occurs when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the high probability / low base state, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is not passed. Immediately controlled to high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state).

If it is not the first probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot completed this time is the second probability variation jackpot (step 080IWS2220). Whether or not it is the second probability variation jackpot can be determined by checking, for example, the jackpot type stored in step 080IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing or step 080IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is the second probability change jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the probability change flag and shifts to the probability change state (step 080IWS2221), and at the same time, sets the special figure time reduction flag and shifts to the KT state (step 080IWS2222).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation storage flag is set (step 080IWS2223). If the probability variation memory flag is not set (N in step 080IWS2223), that is, if the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the low probability / low base state or the low probability / high base state, the high base flag is set. Along with the transition to the high base state (step 080IWS2224), the high base number counter is set to "50" (step 080IWS2225). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2228. Therefore, if the second probability variation jackpot occurs when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the low probability / low base state or the low probability / high base state, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). ), And then when the 50-time variation display is completed, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is controlled to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state).

On the other hand, if the probability variation memory flag is set (Y in step 080IWS2223), that is, if the jackpot symbol is in the high probability / high base state or the high probability / low base state at the time of derivation display, the process directly proceeds to step 080IWS2228. To do. Therefore, if the second probability variation jackpot occurs when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the high probability / high base state or the high probability / low base state, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). ) Is immediately controlled to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state).

If it is not the second probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is the third probability variation jackpot), the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (step 080IWS2226), and sets the special figure time reduction flag to enter the KT state. Transition (step 080IWS2227). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2228. Therefore, regardless of the game state at the time of derivation display of the jackpot symbol, when the third probability variation jackpot is reached, the high probability / high probability / high probability immediately without going through the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). It is controlled to a low base state (high probability / second KT state).

Next, if set, the CPU 103 resets the probability variation storage flag and the high-base storage flag (step 080IWS2228). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step 080IWS2229).

(Small hit end processing)
FIG. 9-22 is a flowchart showing a small hit end process (step S128) in the accessory control process process. In the small hit end process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step 080IWS2300), and if the small hit end display timer is set, proceeds to step 080IWS2302. When the small hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 displays on the small hit end display timer corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time). A value corresponding to the time is set (step 080IWS2301), and the process ends.

In step 080IWS2302, the value of the small hit end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 080IWS2302). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 080IWS2303). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step 080IWS2303), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 080IWS2304). If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the right-handed display 26 is lit (step 080IWS2305). If the right-handed display 26 is lit, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 080IWS2306), and also transmits a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed (step 080IWS2307).

In this example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the non-KT state, the right-handed indicator 26 starts lighting at the start of the small hit game (steps 080IWS2028B to S2030B). (See), the processing of steps 080IWS2304 to S2307 is executed, so that the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on at the end of the small hit game.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step 080IWS2308).

(Transition of game state)
Here, the transition of the gaming state in the feature unit 080IW will be described. FIG. 9-23 is an explanatory diagram showing a list of gaming states controlled after the jackpot game for each jackpot type. Further, FIG. 9-24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to transition the gaming state in the feature unit 080IW.

As shown in FIG. 9-23, in the case of a normal jackpot, it is controlled to a low probability / high base state (first KT state) after the jackpot game regardless of the gaming state at the time of derivation display of the jackpot symbol, and then 50. When the variation display of the times is finished, the low probability / high base state (first KT state) is finished and the control is performed to the low probability / low base state (normal state) (see steps 080IWS2205-S2207).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-23, in the case of the first probability variation jackpot, if the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the low probability / low base state (normal state), the high probability / high after the jackpot game. It is controlled to the base state (first KT state), and after that, when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed, it is controlled from the high probability / high base state (first KT state) to the high probability / low base state (second KT state) ( Step 080 IWS2209-S2214).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-23, when the first probability variation jackpot is obtained, the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the low probability / high base state (first KT state) or the high probability / high base state (first KT state). If there is, it is controlled to a high probability / high base state (1st KT state) after the big hit game, and after that, when the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed, the high probability / high probability / high probability / from the high base state (1st KT state). It is controlled to a low base state (second KT state) (see steps 080IWS2209 to S2212, S2215, S2216, S2217 to S2219).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-23, in the case of the first probability variation jackpot, if the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the high probability / low base state (second KT state), the high probability / high base state is reached. It is controlled to a high probability / low base state (second KT state) immediately after the big hit game without going through (the first KT state) (see steps 080IWS2209 to S2211, S2217).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-23, when the second probability variation jackpot is obtained, the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in a low probability / low base state (first KT state) or a low probability / high base state (first KT state). If there is, it is controlled to a high probability / high base state (1st KT state) after the big hit game, and after that, when the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed, the high probability / high probability / high probability / from the high base state (1st KT state). It is controlled to a low base state (second KT state) (see steps 080IWS2221 to S2225).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-23, when the second probability variation jackpot is obtained, the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in a high probability / high base state (first KT state) or a high probability / low base state (second KT state). If there is, it is controlled to the high probability / low base state (second KT state) immediately after the big hit game without going through the high probability / high base state (first KT state) (see steps 080IWS2221 to S2223).

As shown in FIG. 9-23, in the case of the third probability variation big hit, the big hit game does not go through the high probability / high base state (first KT state) regardless of the game state at the time of derivation display of the big hit symbol. It is immediately controlled to a high probability / low base state (second KT state) (see steps 080IWS2226 to S2227).

In this example, in the case of the third probability variation jackpot, the case where the jackpot symbol is immediately controlled to the high probability / low base state (second KT state) regardless of the game state at the time of derivation display is shown. , Not limited to such aspects. For example, even in the case of the third probability variation jackpot, if the gaming state at the time of derivation display of the jackpot symbol is the low probability / low base state (normal state), the high probability / high base state (1st KT) is once. It may be configured to be controlled to the state) and then to shift to the high probability / low base state (second KT state) based on the completion of the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times).

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-23, when the gaming state at the time of derivation display of the jackpot symbol is the high probability / low base state (second KT state), the first probability variation jackpot or the second Even if it becomes a probability variation big hit, it is immediately controlled to a high probability / low base state (second KT state), but by configuring in that way, a high probability / low base state (second KT state (small hit RUSH)) It is possible to prevent disappointment about the end of. That is, even in the high probability / low base state (second KT state), the variation display of the first special symbol may be executed, and when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the first Since the decision rate of the probability variation jackpot and the second probability variation jackpot is high, there is a possibility that the player may feel uneasy that the high probability / low base state (second KT state (small hit RUSH)) may end. There is. Therefore, in this example, when the player is in the high probability / low base state (second KT state), the high probability / low base state (second KT state) is immediately controlled even when the first probability variation jackpot or the second probability variation jackpot occurs. It is configured so that the player can be prevented from giving such a feeling of disappointment.

In this feature unit 080IW, in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the player performs a game ball launch operation (left-handed) aiming at the left side of the game area. Therefore, in the normal state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the first starting winning opening, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-24, when the third probability variation jackpot occurs in the low probability / low base state, it shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) after the end of the jackpot game. , The high probability / low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 080IWS2226-S2227). However, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the third probability variation jackpot is only 5%, and the ratio is low. In addition, when the first probability variation jackpot or the second probability variation jackpot occurs in the low probability / low base state, it shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game, and then The high probability / high base state is maintained until the jackpot of the above occurs or the variation display of 50 or 100 times is completed (see steps 080IWS2209 to S2214 and S2221 to 2225). In addition, when a normal big hit occurs in a low probability / low base state, the game shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the big hit game, and whether the next big hit occurs or 50 The low probability / high base state is maintained until the end of the variation display of the times (see steps 080IWS2205-S2207).

After shifting to the KT state (high probability / high base state, low probability / high base state, high probability / low base state), in this feature 080IW, the player aims at the right side of the game area. And perform the firing operation (right-handed) of the game ball. Therefore, in the KT state, the start winning is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-24, when the second probability variation jackpot or the third probability variation jackpot occurs in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), the high probability / low after the end of the jackpot game. It shifts to the base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 080IWS2221 to S2223 and S2226 to S2227). In addition, when the first probability variation jackpot occurs in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), it shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. Then, the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed (see steps 080IWS2209 to S2211, S2217 to S2219). In addition, when a normal jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game. The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 variation display is completed (see steps 080IW080IWS2205-S2207). Further, in this example, in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), the high probability / low base is also obtained when the fluctuation display of 50 times or 100 times is completed without the next big hit. It shifts to the state (high probability / second KT state) (see steps 080IWS67A to S71A and S67B to S71B).

As shown in FIG. 9-24, when the third probability variation jackpot occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), the high probability / low base state (high probability) after the end of the jackpot game. / Second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 080IWS2226 to S2227). In addition, when the first probability variation jackpot or the second probability variation jackpot occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), the high probability / high base state (high probability / first) after the end of the jackpot game. The 1KT state) is entered, and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the 50 fluctuation display is completed (see steps 080IWS2209 to S2212, S2215, S2216, S2221 to S2225). In addition, when a normal jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game. The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 variation display is completed (see steps 080IWS2205-S2207). In addition, when the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed without the occurrence of the next jackpot after the normal jackpot occurs and the probability / high base state is reached, the fluctuation display is completed as shown in FIG. 9-24. Probability / transition to low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) (see steps 080IWS67A-S72A, S67B-S72B).

As shown in FIG. 9-24, when the first probability variation jackpot, the second probability variation jackpot, or the third probability variation jackpot occurs in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), the jackpot game After the end, it shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (steps 080IWS2209 to S2211, S2217, S2221 to S2223, S2226). (See S2227). In addition, when a normal jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game. The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 fluctuation display is completed (see steps 080IWS2205-S2207).

In addition, in FIG. 9-24, the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is described, but the variation of the second special symbol is performed at a low rate. It is possible that the display will be performed. Further, in FIG. 9-24, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. Further, in FIG. 9-24, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. Further, in FIG. 9-24, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed.

(Main processing of production control)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 9-25 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the effect control main process in the feature unit 080IW. In FIGS. 9-25, the processing of steps 080IWS201 to S205 is the same as the processing of steps S71 to S75 shown in FIG.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first small symbol process process (step 080IWS206). In this example, by executing the first small symbol process process of step 080IWS206, in the image display device 5, the first small symbol is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol in addition to the variable display of the decorative symbol. Fluctuation display is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the second small symbol process process (step 080IWS207). In this example, by executing the second small symbol process process of step 080IWS207, in the image display device 5, the second small symbol is synchronized with the variable display of the second special symbol in addition to the variable display of the decorative symbol. Fluctuation display is executed.

In this example, the small symbols (first small symbol, second small symbol) have a smaller display size than the decorative symbol and are difficult to see as compared with the decorative symbol. Further, in this example, when the pseudo-ream is executed, the re-variation is executed once or multiple times to execute the variation display again after the pseudo-ream chance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the variation display of the decorative symbol. However, with regard to the variable display of the small symbol, the variable display of the small symbol is continuously executed without the temporary stop display or the re-variation even when the pseudo-ream is executed. Further, in this example, as will be described later, a shutter effect of displaying a shutter image on the image display device 5 may be executed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the decorative symbol is not displayed when the shutter effect is performed. Although it is a display, the variable display of the small symbol is continuously executed so as to be visible even during the execution of the shutter effect. In addition, the decorative symbol and the hold display are hidden during the execution of the shutter effect, but the first small symbol and the second small symbol are hidden regardless of whether the decorative symbol or the hold display is hidden. Fluctuation display is executed.

9-26 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the stop symbol of the small symbol (first small symbol, second small symbol). As shown in FIGS. 9-26, in this example, when a big hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the symbol combination (big hit symbol) of "333" is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the first small symbol. To. Further, when a big hit is obtained in the variable display of the second special symbol, the symbol combination (big hit symbol) of "777" is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the second small symbol.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-26, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the symbol combination of "765" as the stop symbol of the first small symbol (small hit symbol). Is stopped and displayed. Further, when a small hit is obtained in the variable display of the second special symbol, the symbol combination (small hit symbol) of "765" is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the second small symbol.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-26, in this example, when the non-reach is out of the variable display of the first special symbol, the symbol combination (non-reach) of "123" is used as the stop symbol of the first small symbol. The out-of-order symbol) is stopped and displayed. Further, when the reach is lost in the variable display of the first special symbol, the symbol combination of "323" (the reach-off symbol) is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the first small symbol. Further, when the non-reach is lost in the variable display of the second special symbol, the symbol combination of "567" (non-reach out-of-reach symbol) is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the second small symbol. Further, when the reach is out of the variation display of the second special symbol, the symbol combination of "767" (the out-reach symbol) is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the second small symbol.

Next, the process of step 080IWS208 is the same as the process of step S76 shown in FIG.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the fourth symbol process process (step 080IWS209). In this example, by executing the fourth symbol process process of step 080IWS209, the special symbol is displayed in the image display device 5 separately from the variable display of the decorative symbol and the small symbol (first small symbol, second small symbol). The variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of.

In this example, when the pseudo-ream is executed, the re-variation is executed once or multiple times to execute the variation display again after the pseudo-ream chance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the variation display of the decorative symbol. However, regarding the variable display of the fourth symbol, even when the pseudo-ream is executed, the variable display of the small symbol is continuously executed without the temporary stop display or the re-variation. Further, in this example, as will be described later, a shutter effect of displaying a shutter image on the image display device 5 may be executed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the decorative symbol is not displayed when the shutter effect is performed. Although it is a display, the variable display of the fourth symbol is continuously executed so as to be visible even during the execution of the shutter effect. In addition, the decorative symbol and the hold display are hidden during the execution of the shutter effect, but the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed regardless of whether the decorative symbol or the hold display is hidden or not. To.

Next, the process of step 080IWS210 is the same as the process of step S77 shown in FIG.

(Command analysis processing)
9-27 to 9-30 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step 080IWS205). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 080IWS611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 080IWS612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 080IWS613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 080IWS614), the effect control CPU 0120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step). 080IWS615).

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 080IWS616), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 080IWS617). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 080IWS618).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step 080IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 080IWS620). ).

If the received effect control command is one of the symbol confirmation command (1st symbol confirmation command, 2nd symbol confirmation command, 1st forced symbol confirmation command, 2nd forced symbol confirmation command) (step 080IWS621) ), The effect control CPU 120 sets the confirmation command reception flag corresponding to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 080IWS622). For example, when the first symbol confirmation command is received, the first confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation command is received, the second confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first forced confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the second forced confirmation command reception flag is set.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 080IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start displaying the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 080IWS624). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 080IWS625).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 080IWS626). In this example, as will be described later, when the right-handed notification is not being performed (for example, during the low probability / low base state (normal state)), the variation display of the decorative symbol is executed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol. Then, when the right-handed notification is being performed (for example, in the KT state), the variation display of the decorative symbol is executed corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol. Therefore, even if the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the right-handed notification is being performed, or even if the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the right-handed notification is not performed. In the case of (hereinafter referred to as irregular jackpot), the variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed. If the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (Y in step 080IWS626), that is, if it is not an irregular jackpot, the process directly proceeds to step 080IWS611.

If the value of the effect control process flag is not a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (N in step 080IWS626), it is a case of an irregular big hit and a case where the variation display of the decorative symbol is not executed. In this case, as will be described later, since the shutter effect is executed in the case of an irregular big hit, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to end the shutter effect (step 080IWS627).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the effect during the big hit (step 080IWS628). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 080IWS629), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 080IWS630).

After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during the jackpot (step S176) (step 080IWS631).

In this example, in the case of a normal jackpot that is not irregular, the control is performed to start displaying the prize ball number display at the start of the jackpot game (see steps 080IWS9711 and S9712), but in the case of an irregular jackpot. Similarly, the display of the number of prize balls may be started.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 080IWS632), the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the display of the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 080IWS633). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 080IWS634).

In this example, by executing the processes of steps 080IWS624 and S633, a right-handed display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the jackpot game.

If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step 080IWS635), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit start designation command reception flag (step 080IWS636).

If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step 080IWS637), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit end designation command reception flag (step 080IWS638).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting start designation command (step 080IWS639), the effect control CPU 120 sets a right-handed lighting flag indicating that right-handed lighting is being performed (step 063IWS640), and right. Control is performed to start lighting the hit notification LED 37 (step 080IWS641). Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls to replace the decorative symbol displayed on the image display device 5 with the same symbol as the second small symbol and display it (step 080IWS642).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting end specification command (step 080IWS643), the effect control CPU 120 resets the right-handed lighting flag (step 063IWS644), and the effect control CPU 120 is the right-handed notification LED 37. Control is performed to end the lighting of (step 080IWS645).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol (in this example, the combination of the symbols of "333") is stopped and displayed as the first small symbol in the image display device 5 (). Step 080IWS646). Unless the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the first small symbol, the effect control CPU 120 controls to replace the decorative symbol displayed on the image display device 5 with the same symbol as the first small symbol and display it. (Step 080IWS647). If the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the first small symbol, the effect control CPU 120 initially rolls the decorative symbol displayed on the image display device 5 (in this example, the symbol of "135". The display is controlled by replacing with (combination) (step 080IWS648).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 resets the prize ball number counter for counting the number of prize balls (step 080IWS649).

In this example, by executing the process of step 080IWS649, the value of the prize ball counter is reset at the timing when the right-handed lighting end designation command is received and the left-handed operation is started. Therefore, in this example, when the right-handed lighting start designation command is first received and the right-handed operation is started, the counting of the value of the prize ball counter is started, and the right-handed lighting end designation command is received and left-handed. The counting of the value of the prize ball counter will be completed at the timing when the operation is started.

If the received effect control command is a low accuracy / non-KT background specification command (step 080IWS650), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the low probability / non-KT state (for example, Control to display in (blue background image) (step 080IWS651). If the effect control CPU 120 is set, the effect control CPU 120 resets the first KT state flag indicating that it is in the first KT state (step 080IWS652).

If the received effect control command is a low accuracy / first KT background designation command (step 080IWS653), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the low probability / first KT state (for example, Control to display with the green background image) (step 080IWS654). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first KT state flag (step 080IWS655), and if it is set, the high probability state flag indicating that it is in the high probability state and the second KT state indicating that it is in the second KT state. Reset the 2KT status flag (step 080IWS656).

If the received effect control command is a high-accuracy / first KT background designation command (step 080IWS657), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the high probability / first KT state (for example, Control to display with the yellow background image) (step 080IWS658). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the first KT state flag (step 080IWS659), and resets the second KT state flag if set (step 080IWS660).

If the received effect control command is a high-accuracy / second KT background designation command (step 080IWS661), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the high probability / second KT state (for example, The display is controlled by the red background image) (step 080IWS662). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the second KT state flag (step 080IWS663), and resets the first KT state flag if set (step 080IWS664).

If the received effect control command is a large prize opening prize designation command (step 080IWS665), the effect control CPU 120 adds 15 to the value of the prize ball counter (step 080IWS666). Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls to update the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition (step 080IWS667).

If the received effect control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 080IWS668), it is confirmed whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 080IWS669). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 120 adds 10 to the value of the prize ball counter (step 080IWS670). Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls to update the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition (step 080IWS671).

By executing the processes of steps 080IWS668 to S671, in this example, the special winning opening is won in the small hit gaming state during the second KT state, except when the winning opening is won during the big hit game. The prize ball number display is also updated when

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 executes a process of storing the received effect control command or setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 080IWS672). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS611.

(Variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 9-31 is a flowchart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command has been received (step 080IWS811). Whether or not the variation pattern command is received is determined by, for example, setting a variation pattern command reception flag indicating that the variation pattern command has been received when the variation pattern command is received in the command analysis process (step 080IWS205). In step 080IWS811, it may be confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set.

If the variation pattern command is received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the right-handed lighting flag is set (step 080IWS812). If the right-handed lighting flag is not set (that is, if the left-handed operation is being performed instead of the right-handed notification), the effect control CPU 120 executes the variation display of the first special symbol. Check if this is the case (step 080IWS813). Whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the first variation patterns # 01 to # 12. It can be determined by confirming whether or not. Unless it is the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (that is, the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol), the process is terminated as it is. If the variation display of the first special symbol is to be executed, the process proceeds to step 080IWS815.

If the right-handed lighting flag is set (that is, if right-handed notification is in progress and right-handed operation is being performed), the effect control CPU 120 executes the variation display of the second special symbol. Check if this is the case (step 080IWS814). Whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the second variation patterns # 01 to # 34. It can be determined by confirming whether or not. Unless the variation display of the second special symbol is executed (that is, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed), the process is terminated as it is. If the variation display of the second special symbol is to be executed, the process proceeds to step 080IWS815.

By executing the process of steps 080IWS812 to S814, in the feature unit 080IW, when the left-handed operation is in progress, the image display device 5 displays the variation of the decorative symbol in response to the variation display of the first special symbol. Is executed, and when the right-handed operation is in progress, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. In other words, even if the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the right-handed operation is being performed, or even if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the left-handed operation is being performed. In this case, the variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the shutter effect is being executed (step 080IWS815). Whether or not the shutter effect is being executed is determined by, for example, setting a flag indicating that the shutter effect is being executed when the shutter effect is started in step 080IWS819 of the variable display start waiting process, and step 080IWS815. Then, it is sufficient to confirm whether or not the flag is set.

If the shutter effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to end the shutter effect (step 080IWS816). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to restart the display of the decorative symbol and the hold display (step 080IWS817).

By executing the processing of steps 080IWS815 to S817, in this example, when the shutter effect is executed in the variation display of the decorative symbol of the deviation variation or the small hit variation corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, the shutter effect is performed in the middle. 2 If the variable display of the special symbol is not started, after the variable display of the first special symbol is finished, the shutter effect is finished at the timing when the variable display of the next decorative symbol is started, and the decorative symbol and the hold display are displayed. The display resumes. In addition, when the shutter effect is executed in the variation display of the decorative symbol of the deviation variation or the small hit variation corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, if the variation display of the first special symbol is not started in the middle, the second After the variable display of the special symbol is finished, the shutter effect is ended at the timing when the variable display of the next decorative symbol is started, and the display of the decorative symbol and the hold display is resumed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is the variation pattern for the shutter effect (step 080IWS818). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not any of the second fluctuation patterns # 14 to # 16 is specified. If it is a variation pattern for the shutter effect, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start the shutter effect (step 080IWS819). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 controls to erase the decorative symbol and the hold display displayed on the image display device 5 (step 080IWS820).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 080IWS821).

When the variation display of the second special symbol is not executed in step 080IWS814, that is, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed but the right-handed notification is being performed, an irregular jackpot is obtained. The shutter effect start process 1 which is the process of starting the shutter effect of (step 080IWS822) is executed. In this example, in the case of an irregular jackpot, there is a case where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, but there is a case where right-handed notification is being performed and a case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Is not in the right-handed notification, but the shutter effect start processing 1 is a case where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, but the control to start the shutter effect when the right-handed notification is in progress is performed. This is the process to be performed.

Further, in this example, when the fluctuation display of the 50th variation of the low probability / high base state (first KT state) is completed, the fluctuation display is controlled to the low probability / low base state (normal state), but usually the low probability / Since it is in the high base state (first KT state), the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the fluctuation display of the 50th fluctuation, and it is controlled to the low probability / low base state (normal state). However, the variation display of the first special symbol may be executed irregularly as the variation display of the 50th variation and controlled to the low probability / low base state (normal state). In this case, the variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed. It suddenly appears to be controlled to a low probability / low base state (normal state) without being executed. In this example, even when such an irregular 50th variation display is executed, the shutter effect is started by executing the shutter effect start process 1.

If the variation display of the first special symbol is not executed in step 080IWS813, that is, if the variation display of the second special symbol is executed but the right-handed notification is not being performed, an irregular jackpot may occur. The shutter effect start process 2 which is the process of starting the shutter effect is executed (step 080IWS832). The shutter effect start process 2 is a process for controlling the start of the shutter effect when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed but the right-handed notification is not being performed.

FIG. 9-32 (A) is a flowchart showing the shutter effect start processing 1 (step 080IWS822). In the shutter effect start processing 1, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a first variation pattern (first variation pattern # 05, # 06, # 09, # 12) for which the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command is a jackpot. It is confirmed whether or not it is (step 080IWS501). If it is the first variation pattern for big hits (that is, if it is an irregular big hit), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current gaming state is a low probability / high base state (step). 080IWS502). It should be noted that whether or not the low probability / high base state is set can be determined by checking, for example, whether or not the high probability state flag is turned off and only the first KT state flag is set (step 080IWS655). reference). In the low probability / high base state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start the normal / time saving shutter effect (step 080IWS503). It should be noted that the decorative design and the hold display may be erased during the execution of the normal / time saving shutter effect.

If it is not a low probability / high base state, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability / high base state (step 080IWS504). It should be noted that whether or not the high probability / high base state is set can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the high probability state flag and the first KT state flag are set (see step 080IWS659). In the high probability / high base state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start the shutter effect for the high probability / high base state (step 080IWS505). It should be noted that the decorative symbol and the hold display may be erased during the execution of the shutter effect for the high probability / high base state.

If it is not a high probability / high base state, it means that the current gaming state is a high probability / low base state. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start the shutter effect for the small hit RUSH (step 080IWS506). It should be noted that while the shutter effect for the small hit RUSH is being executed, the decorative design and the hold display may be erased.

If it is not the first fluctuation pattern for big hits, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation patterns indicated by the received fluctuation pattern commands are the first fluctuation patterns # 7 and # 8 (step 080IWS507). If the first variation patterns # 7 and # 8 (that is, when executing the variation display of the 50th variation in the low probability / high base state), the effect control CPU 120 ends in a short time in the image display device 5. Control is performed to start the shutter effect for time (step 080IWS508). It should be noted that the decorative design and the hold display may be erased during the execution of the shutter effect for the end of the time saving.

FIG. 9-32 (B) is a flowchart showing the shutter effect start processing 2 (step 080IWS823). In the shutter effect start processing 2, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a second variation pattern (first variation pattern # 03, # 06, # 13, # 16, # 16,) for which the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command is a jackpot. It is confirmed whether or not it is # 21, # 28, # 34) (step 080IWS511). If it is the second variation pattern for big hits (that is, in the case of irregular big hits), the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start the normal / time saving shutter effect (step 080IWS512). ). It should be noted that the decorative design and the hold display may be erased during the execution of the normal / time saving shutter effect.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 9-33 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the right-handed lighting flag is set (step 080IWS920). If the right-handed lighting flag is not set (that is, if the right-handed lighting is not being notified and the left-handed operation is being performed), the effect control CPU 120 is set as the first small stop symbol of the decorative symbol. The combination of the same symbols as the stop symbol of the first small symbol determined in the symbol process process (step 080IWS206) is determined (step 080IWS921). If the right-handed lighting flag is set (that is, when right-handed notification is in progress and right-handed operation is being performed), the effect control CPU 120 uses the second small as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. The combination of the same symbols as the stop symbol of the second small symbol determined in the symbol process process (step 080IWS207) is determined (step 080IWS922).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation display this time is out of order (step 080IWS923). To check whether the variable display this time is out of order, for example, check whether the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area is the display result 1 designation command. Can be determined by. If there is no deviation fluctuation, the process proceeds to step 080IWS927 as it is. If the fluctuation is out of alignment (Y in step 080IWS923), the effect control CPU 120 executes a set value suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the set value suggestion effect that suggests the currently set setting value. (Step 080IWS924).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 080IWS925). If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not the second KT state), the process proceeds to step 080IWS927 as it is. If the second KT state flag is set (Y in step 080IWS925), that is, in the second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) continues. A small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the continuation suggestion effect is executed (step 080IWS926).

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the variation pattern of the decorative symbol to be used, the set value suggestion effect, and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect based on the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command. Selects the process table according to the set value suggestion effect and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect (step 080IWS927).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the process table selected in step 080IWS927 to the process timer and starts the process timer (step 080IWS928). Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display device 5, various lamps, speakers 8L, 8R) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Is executed (step 080IWS929). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a control signal (display control execution data) to the VDP in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

However, in this example, when the shutter effect is executed, the decorative symbol is hidden, so that the variable display of the decorative symbol is not executed (small symbol (first small symbol, second small symbol)). The variable display of the fourth symbol is executed).

When it is decided to execute the set value suggestion effect, step 080IWS929 and the variable display effect process (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the set value suggestion effect selected in step 080IWS927. The set value suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation display of the symbol (during the deviation fluctuation).

Further, when it is decided to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, step 080IWS929 and the variable display during effect process (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect selected in step 080IWS927. As a result, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variation display of the decorative symbol (during the deviation variation in the second KT state).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time in the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer and starts the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer (step 080IWS930). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process (step S172) during variable display (step 080IWS931).

(Variable display production processing)
9-34 and 9-35 are flowcharts showing the variable display during effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 080IWS8101) and 1 subtracts the value of the decorative symbol variation time timer (step 080IWS8102). When the process timer times out (step 080IWS8103), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 080IWS8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step 080IWS8105).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the right-handed lighting flag is set (step 080IWS8106). If the right-handed lighting flag is not set (that is, if the left-handed operation is being performed instead of the right-handed notification), has the effect control CPU 120 received the first symbol confirmation designation command? Whether or not (for example, whether or not the first confirmation command reception flag is set) is confirmed (step 080IWS8107). If the first symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 080IWS8110).

If the first symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the first forced symbol confirmation designation command (for example, whether the first forced confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 080IWS8108). If the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 080IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with an outlier symbol (step 080IWS8109). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 080IWS8110).

If the right-handed lighting flag is set in step 080IWS8106 (that is, if right-handed notification is in progress and right-handed operation is being performed), the effect control CPU 120 issues the second symbol confirmation designation command. It is confirmed whether or not the command has been received (for example, whether or not the second confirmation command reception flag is set) (step 080IWS8111). If the second symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 080IWS8114).

If the second symbol confirmation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the second forced symbol confirmation command (for example, whether the second forced confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 080IWS8112). If the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 080IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with an outlier symbol (step 080IWS8113). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 080IWS8114).

If the first forced symbol confirmation command is not received in step 080IWS8108, or if the second forced symbol confirmation command is not received in step 080IWS8112, the effect control CPU 120 is executing the shutter effect. It is confirmed whether or not it is (step 080IWS8115). Whether or not the shutter effect is being executed is determined by, for example, setting a flag indicating that the shutter effect is being executed when the shutter effect is started in step 080IWS819 of the variable display start waiting process, and step 080IWS8115. Then, it is sufficient to confirm whether or not the flag is set.

If the shutter effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation display during execution is a jackpot variation (step 080IWS8116). If it is not a big hit variation (that is, if it is a missed variation or a small hit variation), the effect control CPU 120 executes the variation display of the decorative symbol being executed in response to the variation display of the first special symbol. It is confirmed whether or not it is (step 080IWS8117). To check whether the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed is executed in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, for example, check whether the right-handed lighting flag is set. It can be judged by doing.

If the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed is executed in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol has started. (Step 080IWS8118). It should be noted that whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol has been started can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the variation pattern command that specifies the second variation pattern # 01 to # 34 has been received. If the variation display of the second special symbol has not been started, the process proceeds to step 080IWS8122 as it is.

The variable display of the decorative symbol being executed does not correspond to the variable display of the first special symbol, that is, the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed corresponds to the variable display of the second special symbol. If it is executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol has been started (step 080IWS8119). It should be noted that whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol has been started can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the variation pattern commands that specify the first variation patterns # 01 to # 12 have been received. If the variable display of the first special symbol has not been started, the process proceeds to step 080IWS8122 as it is.

When the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed is executed in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the variable display of the second special symbol is started (Y in step 080IWS8118), or during execution. When the variation display of the decorative symbol is executed in response to the variation display of the second special symbol and the variation display of the first special symbol is started (Y in step 080IWS8119), the effect control CPU 120 , The image display device 5 controls to end the shutter effect (step 080IWS8120). Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to restart the display of the decorative design and the hold display (step 080IWS8121).

By executing the process of step 080IWS8115 to S8121, in this example, when the shutter effect is executed in the variation display of the decorative symbol of the deviation variation or the small hit variation corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, the shutter effect is performed on the way. 2 When the variable display of the special symbol is started, the shutter effect is ended at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, and the display of the decorative symbol and the hold display is restarted. In addition, when the shutter effect is executed in the variation display of the decorative symbol of the deviation variation or the small hit variation corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, if the variation display of the first special symbol is started in the middle, the variation display is performed. The shutter effect is ended at the timing when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, and the display of the decorative symbol and the hold display is resumed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the decorative symbol variation time timer has timed out (step 080IWS8122). If the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer has timed out, the effect control CPU 120 switches to the process data for the standby effect (step 080IWS8123). Then, the effect control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 080IWS8124).

In this example, as described above, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a miss, a small hit, or a probability variation big hit, is being executed. In the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. In addition, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol, which is a miss, a small hit, or a probability variation big hit, is being executed, during the small hit game. , The update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. The fact that the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer timed out in step 080IWS8122 without receiving any of the symbol confirmation designation commands means that the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted in this way, and the first This is the case where the variable display of the special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed. In this case, in this example, the processing of steps 080IWS8123 and S8124 is executed to switch to the standby effect, and then the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is restarted, and finally one special The standby effect is continued until the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is completed. The "standby effect" is, for example, an effect in which the image display device 5 puts the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right into a temporary stop state in a state of shaking or slightly changing.

In this example, the image display device 5 also executes the variable display of the small symbols (first small symbol, second small symbol) and the fourth symbol, but the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer When the update is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed, the variable display of these small symbols (first small symbol, second small symbol) and the fourth symbol is also performed. It will continue to run. Then, when the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is restarted and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finally stopped and displayed, these small symbols (first small symbol, The variation display of the second small symbol) and the fourth symbol is also stopped and displayed.

(Waiting processing per special figure)
9-36 and 9-37 are flowcharts showing a special figure hit waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process process. In the special symbol hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set (step 080IWS9701). .. If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step 080IWS9707. In this feature unit 080IW, when the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step 080IWS9706. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when the jackpot effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the jackpot symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the effect during the jackpot has not yet been executed. Therefore, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 080IWS9704 is performed. The process proceeds to step 080IWS9707 without execution.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set. (Step 080IWS9702). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process proceeds to step 080IWS9719. In the feature unit 080IW, when the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step 080IWS9718. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when the small hit medium effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the small hit medium effect has not yet been executed. Therefore, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 080IWS9704 is displayed. The process proceeds to step 080IWS9719 without executing the process.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the shutter effect is being executed (step 080IWS9703). Whether or not the shutter effect is being executed is determined by, for example, setting a flag indicating that the shutter effect is being executed when the shutter effect is started in step 080IWS819 of the variable display start waiting process, and step 080IWS9703. Then, it is sufficient to confirm whether or not the flag is set. If the shutter effect is being executed, the process directly proceeds to step 080IWS9705. That is, in this example, since the decorative symbol is controlled not to be displayed during the execution of the shutter effect, it is controlled not to perform the process of confirming and displaying the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 080IWS9704.

If the shutter effect is not being executed, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to confirm and display the stop symbol (missing symbol, big hit symbol, small hit symbol) of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols being displayed. (Step 080IWS9704). When the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command or the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received and the process of replacing with the misaligned symbol is executed in steps 080IWS8109 and S8113, the effect control CPU 120 is deviated from the symbol in step 080IWS9704. Is controlled to be confirmed and displayed.

When the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 080IWS9704 (Y in step 080IWS9705), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 080IWS9706).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received (step 080IWS9707). When the jackpot start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 080IWS9708).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the shutter effect is being executed (step 080IWS9709). Whether or not the shutter effect is being executed is determined by, for example, setting a flag indicating that the shutter effect is being executed when the shutter effect is started in step 080IWS819 of the variable display start waiting process, and step 080IWS9709. Then, it is sufficient to confirm whether or not the flag is set. If the shutter effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to end the shutter effect (step 080IWS9710). When the shutter effect is finished in step 080IWS9710, the screen is controlled to the jackpot game state, and when the image display device 5 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol after the jackpot game is finished, the decorative symbol and the hold display are displayed. It will be resumed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the prize ball number display is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 080IWS9711). If the prize ball number display is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the prize ball number display based on the current value of the prize ball number counter (step 080IWS9712). ..

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the effect during the big hit (step 080IWS9713). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 080IWS9714), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 080IWS9715).

After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during the jackpot (step S176) (step 080IWS9716).

If the big hit symbol is not confirmed and displayed in the process of step 080IWS9704 (N in step 080IWS9705), and if the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 080IWS9704 (Y in step 080IWS9717), the effect control CPU 120 is stopped. The symbol display flag 2 is set (step 080IWS9718).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 080IWS9719). When the small hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 080IWS9720).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the small hit medium effect (step 080IWS9721). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 080IWS9722), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 080IWS9723).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process (step S174) (step 080IWS9724).

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step 080IWS9704 (that is, when the missed symbol is displayed) (N of step 080IWS9705 and N of step 080IWS9717), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 080IWS9725).

(Production processing during big hit)
FIG. 9-38 is a flowchart showing the big hit middle effect process (step S176) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the jackpot middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not any of the jackpot end designation command reception commands has been received (for example, whether or not any of the jackpot end designation command reception flags have been set). (Step 080IWS2901). If any of the jackpot end designation commands is received, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 080IWS2902), and the effect device (image display device 5, speaker 8L,) according to the contents of the process data n. 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) are controlled (step 080IWS2903).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 080IWS2904), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 080IWS2905). That is, it switches to the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step 080IWS2906).

If any of the jackpot end designation commands is received (Y in step 080IWS2901), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot game based on the third probability variation jackpot is terminated (step 080IWS2907). .. If the jackpot game based on the third probability variation jackpot is to be completed, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2912. Unless it is the case of ending the jackpot game based on the third probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the case of ending the jackpot game based on the second probability variation jackpot (step 080IWS2908). When ending the jackpot game based on the second probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the high probability state flag is set (step 080IWS2909). If the high probability state flag is set (that is, high probability / high base state or high probability / low base state), the process proceeds to step 080IWS2912. The effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the case of ending the jackpot game based on the first probability variation jackpot, even if it is not the case of ending the jackpot game based on the second probability variation jackpot (step 080IWS2910). When ending the jackpot game based on the first probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 080IWS2911). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, high probability / low base state (second KT state)), the process proceeds to step 080IWS2912.

When the jackpot game based on the third probability variation jackpot is finished (Y in step 080IWS2907), when the high probability state flag is set (Y in step 080IWS2909), or when the second KT state flag is set (step 080IWS2911). In Y), that is, when the second KT state is controlled after the end of the big hit game, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start the shutter effect (step 080IWS2912). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 controls to erase the decorative design and the hold display displayed on the image display device 5 (step 080IWS2913).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the ending effect (step 080IWS2914). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 080IWS2915), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, game effect lamp 9 as the effect component, and speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 080IWS2916). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect period measurement timer for measuring the effect period of the ending effect (step 080IWS2917). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 also resets the set jackpot end designation command reception flag.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the ending effect process (step 080IWS2918), and ends the jackpot middle effect process.

(Ending production processing)
9-39 is a flowchart showing an ending effect process (step S177) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step 080IWS951). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step 080IWS952).

When the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step 080IWS952), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 080IWS953), and the effect device (image display device 5) according to the contents of the process data n. , Game effect lamp 9, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) is executed (step 080IWS954). For example, an effect of displaying the end of the jackpot or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 080IWS955), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 080IWS956). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step 080IWS957).

If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step 080IWS952), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot game based on the third probability variation jackpot ends (step 080IWS958). If the jackpot game based on the third probability variation jackpot is to be completed, the process proceeds to step 080IWS964. Unless it is the case of ending the jackpot game based on the third probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the case of ending the jackpot game based on the second probability variation jackpot (step 080IWS959). When ending the jackpot game based on the second probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the high probability state flag is set (step 080IWS960). If the high probability state flag is set (that is, high probability / high base state or high probability / low base state), the process proceeds to step 080IWS964. The effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the case of ending the jackpot game based on the first probability variation jackpot, even if it is not the case of ending the jackpot game based on the second probability variation jackpot (step 080IWS961). When ending the jackpot game based on the first probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 080IWS962). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, high probability / low base state (second KT state)), the process proceeds to step 080IWS964.

If the jackpot game based on the first probability variation jackpot is not finished (N in step 080IWS961), or if the second KT state flag is not set (N in step 080IWS962), that is, after the end of the jackpot game this time. When not controlled in the second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 controls to erase the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 (step 0645IWS963). However, in this case, only the prize ball number display is erased, and the prize ball number counter is not reset. Therefore, the game state shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state) and the right-handed operation is performed. The value of the prize ball counter is maintained until the end of.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the shutter effect is being executed (step 080IWS964). Whether or not the shutter effect is being executed is determined by, for example, setting a flag indicating that the shutter effect is being executed when the shutter effect is started in step 080IWS819 of the variable display start waiting process, and step 080IWS964. Then, it is sufficient to confirm whether or not the flag is set. If the shutter effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to end the shutter effect (step 080IWS965). When the shutter effect is finished in step 080IWS965, the display of the decorative symbol and the hold display is resumed when the image display device 5 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 080IWS966).

(Production example)
Next, an effect mode of the effect executed in the feature unit 080IW will be described. First, the display mode of the right-handed notification will be described. FIG. 9-40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display mode of the right-handed notification. In this example, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a big hit is performed, the jackpot game is in progress. As shown in FIG. 9-40 (1), the right-handed display 26 is turned on by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) (see steps 080IWS2022A and S2022B). Further, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (1), the right-handed lighting notification LED 37 is turned on by the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS2023A, S2023B, S641). reference). Further, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (1), the effect control CPU 120 displays a right-handed display 080IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 (see step 080IWS624).

Further, in this example, when a small hit is obtained in the variable display of the second special symbol, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (2)) during the small hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on by the CPU 103) (see step 080IWS2029B). Further, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (2), the right-handed lighting notification LED 37 is turned on by the effect control CPU 120 based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command (see steps 080IWS2030B and S641). .. However, unlike during the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (2), the right-handed display 080IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

On the other hand, in this example, when a small hit is obtained in the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (3), the right-handed display 26 is turned on and the right is turned on during the small hit game. The striking notification LED 37 is not lit, and the right-strike display 080IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

Next, an effect mode of the shutter effect will be described. FIG. 9-41 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode of the shutter effect. In addition, in FIG. 9-41, the effect screen changes in the order of (T1), (T2), (T3), and so on. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-41, the display screen of the image display device 5 displays the decorative symbol display area 080IW010 for displaying the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right, and the first small symbol on the left, middle, and right. A first small symbol display area 080IW011 and a second small symbol display area 080IW012 for displaying the second small symbol on the left, middle, and right are provided. Further, on the display screen of the image display device 5, a fourth symbol display area 080IW013 for displaying the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol and a fourth symbol display for displaying the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed. A region 080IW014 is provided. Further, on the display screen of the image display device 5, a first hold storage display area 080IW015 for displaying the first hold display corresponding to the first hold storage and a second hold display corresponding to the second hold storage are displayed. 2 Hold storage display area 080IW016 is provided.

In this example, the case where the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 080IW013,014 provided on the display screen of the image display device 5 is shown, but it is limited to such an aspect. Absent. For example, a light emitting body such as an LED provided separately from the image display device 5 may be blinked, turned on, or turned off to display light emission, and a variable display of the fourth symbol may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-41 (T1), when the variation display of the second special symbol is started in the low probability / high base state (first KT state), the second small symbol display area 080IW012 corresponds to the start. The variation display of the second small symbol on the left, middle and right is started, the variation display of the decoration symbol on the left, middle and right is started in the decorative symbol display area 080IW010, and the variation display of the fourth symbol is started in the fourth symbol display area 080IW014. Is started. Then, when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T2), the stop symbol of the second small symbol is confirmed and displayed in the second small symbol display area 080IW012, and the decorative symbol is confirmed in the decorative symbol display area 080IW010. The stop symbol of the fourth symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is confirmed and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 080IW014. In FIG. 9-41 (T2), the second small symbol, the decorative symbol, and the out-of-order symbol are definitely displayed as the stop symbol of the fourth symbol.

Next, it is assumed that the variation display of the second special symbol is started as the final variation (50th variation) of the low probability / high base state (first KT state). In this case, based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command for specifying the fluctuation pattern including the shutter effect, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T3), the image display device 5 displays the characters "preparing for big hit". When the shutter effect image 080IW017 including the above is displayed so as to be closed from the left and right, the shutter effect is started (see step 080IWS819). In this example, it is assumed that the second fluctuation pattern # 16 is determined based on the start of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, which is the jackpot fluctuation as the final fluctuation.

Further, when the shutter effect is started, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T3), the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right in the decorative symbol display area 080IW010 are erased, and the first reserved storage display area 080IW015 and the second The hold display displayed in the hold storage display area 080IW016 is erased (see step 080IWS820). However, even if the shutter effect is started and the decorative symbol is erased, the display of the second small symbol in the second small symbol display area 080IW012 is continued, and as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T3), the second small symbol is displayed. In the area 080IW012, the variation display of the second small symbol on the left, middle, and right is started. Further, the display of the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display area 080IW014 is continued, and as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T3), the variable display of the fourth symbol is started in the fourth symbol display area 080IW014.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T4), the shutter effect is continuously executed during the variable display of the second small symbol and the fourth symbol. Then, when the fluctuation time is completed, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T5), the stop symbol of the second small symbol is confirmed and displayed in the second small symbol display area 080IW012, and the stop symbol of the second small symbol is confirmed and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 080IW014. 4 Stop symbol of symbol The symbol is confirmed and displayed. In FIG. 9-41 (T5), the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed as the stop symbol of the second small symbol and the fourth symbol.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T5), in the image display device 5, the right-handed image 080IW018 prompting the right-handed operation of aiming at the right side of the game area and performing the firing operation is superimposed and displayed on the shutter effect image 080IW017. To. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T5), in the image display device 5, the gate passage promotion image 080IW018 for promoting the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is superimposed and displayed on the right-handed image 080IW018.

Next, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and is controlled to the big hit game state, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T6), the right-handed image 080IW018 and the gate passing promotion image 080IW019 are displayed in the image display device 5. The shutter effect ends when the image is hidden by moving it so as to open from the center to the left and right (see step 080IWS9710). Then, when the shutter effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T7), a character display such as "big hit" and a round number display are displayed, and a prize ball number display 080IW020 is displayed. The effect is such that the jackpot game is started immediately after the shutter effect is completed. Then, after that, when the jackpot game is finished and the variable display of the next decorative symbol is started, the display of the decorative symbol and the hold display is resumed.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-41, the case where the final fluctuation (50th fluctuation) in the low probability / high base state (first KT state) is the big hit fluctuation is shown, but the final fluctuation is the missed fluctuation or the small hit. Even in the case of fluctuation, the shutter effect is executed in the same manner as in FIGS. 9-41 (T3) and (T4). Then, after the variation time is completed, when the variation display of the next decorative symbol is started, the shutter effect is terminated and the display of the decorative symbol and the hold display is resumed (see steps 080IWS816 and S817). However, when the shutter effect is executed in the variation display of the decorative symbol of the deviation variation or the small hit variation corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, if the variation display of the second special symbol is started in the middle, the variation display is performed. The shutter effect is ended at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, and the display of the decorative symbol and the hold display is resumed. In addition, when the shutter effect is executed in the variation display of the decorative symbol of the deviation variation or the small hit variation corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, if the variation display of the first special symbol is started in the middle, the variation display is performed. The shutter effect is terminated at the timing when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, and the display of the decorative symbol and the hold display is resumed (see steps 080IWS8115 to S8121).

Next, a mode for switching the display of the decorative pattern will be described. 9-42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a mode of switching the display of the decorative symbol. Although the description is omitted in FIGS. 9-42, the image display device 5 is provided with a fourth symbol display area for displaying the fourth symbol, and the fourth symbol is also displayed (FIG. 9-42). 9-41).

In this example, during the period when the game state is controlled to the low probability / low base state (normal state) and the left-handed operation is performed, the left middle right in the decorative symbol display area 080IW010 corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol. The decorative pattern of is displayed. Therefore, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability / low base state (normal state) of the game state and a big hit is obtained, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the left column of FIG. 9-42 (1) is displayed. As shown, in the first small symbol display area 080IW011, the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed as the stop symbol of the first small symbol, and in the decorative symbol display area 080IW010, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol corresponds to the first special symbol. The same jackpot symbol as the 1 small symbol is confirmed and displayed. After that, when the jackpot game is started, the right-handed operation is performed, so that the display corresponding to the second special symbol is switched to in the decorative symbol display area 080IW010 (see step 080IWS642), and the jackpot game is completed. Then, for example, when shifting to the second KT state, as shown in the right column of FIG. 9-42 (1), the decorative symbol display area 080IW010 has a second small decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. The same symbol as the second small symbol displayed in the symbol display area 080IW012 is displayed.

In this example, when the second KT state is controlled at the end of the jackpot game, the shutter effect is executed (see step 080IWS2912). In this case, for example, in the image display device 5, a shutter in which a character display such as "small hit RUSH is being prepared" is displayed instead of the character display of "preparing for big hit" in FIGS. 9-41 (T3) and (T4). The effect of closing the screen may be performed.

Further, the left column of FIG. 9-42 (2) shows the display state of the decorative symbol immediately before the end of the final variation (50th variation) in the low probability / high base state. In this case, since the right-handed operation is performed, as shown in the left column of FIG. 9-42 (2), the decorative symbol display area 080IW010 has a second decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. The same symbol as the second small symbol displayed in the small symbol display area 080IW012 is displayed. Next, when the final variation (50th variation) is completed and the state shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state), the state shifts to the state in which the left-handed operation is performed. Therefore, the decorative symbol display area 080IW010 is the first special. It switches to the state in which the same symbol as the first small symbol displayed in the first small symbol display area 080IW011 is displayed as a decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol (see step 080IWS647).

However, as shown in FIG. 9-42 (2), if a big hit is accidentally made in the variable display of the first special symbol that was last executed last time, it is displayed in the first small symbol display area 080IW011. The first small symbol may remain the jackpot symbol. In such a case, if the symbol is switched to the same symbol as the first small symbol of the decorative symbol, the player may be misunderstood that the jackpot has occurred even though it is not the case where the jackpot has occurred. .. Therefore, in this example, as shown in the right column of FIG. 9-42 (2), the jackpot symbol is displayed as the first small symbol when the final variation (50th variation) in the low probability / high base state is completed. If it is in the state of being set, the decorative symbol is not switched to the same symbol as the first small symbol, but is configured to be switched to the initial result (in this example, the combination of the symbols of "135"). (See step 080IWS648).

Further, the left column of FIG. 9-42 (3) is controlled to a high probability state or a high base state, and when the right-handed operation is performed, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. The case where it becomes a big hit is shown. In this case, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in the left column of FIG. 9-42 (3), the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed as the stop symbol of the second small symbol in the second small symbol display area 080IW012. In the decorative symbol display area 080IW010, the same jackpot symbol as the second small symbol is confirmed and displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. After that, since the state in which the right-handed operation is being performed continues, the state in which the same symbol as the second small symbol is displayed as the decorative symbol continues, and even when the jackpot game ends, FIG. 9-42 ( As shown in the right column of 3), the same symbol as the second small symbol displayed in the second small symbol display area 080IW012 continues as a decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 080IW010 corresponding to the second special symbol. Is displayed.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-42, a case is shown in which the small symbol on the sub-symbol side of the first small symbol and the second small symbol is always displayed. Not limited. For example, it is not necessary to always display the small symbol on the sub symbol side of the first small symbol and the second small symbol, and it may be configured to be displayed only during the symbol confirmation period of the sub symbol. With such a configuration, the effect display corresponding to the main symbol (reach effect, etc.) can be obtained by omitting the display of unnecessary information while the main symbol of the first small symbol and the second small symbol is changing. It is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player to.

In this example, both the decorative symbol and the small symbol (first small symbol, second small symbol) start the variable display based on the reception of the variable pattern command. In addition, the decorative symbol is in a temporary stop state (sway fluctuation state) before the end of the fluctuation time specified in the fluctuation pattern, and the symbol confirmation designation command (first symbol confirmation designation command, second symbol confirmation designation command, first The confirmation stop state is set based on the reception of the forced symbol confirmation designation command and the second forced symbol confirmation designation command). On the other hand, the small symbol is in the fixed stop state based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command without going through the temporary stop state (sway fluctuation state). Further, for the decorative pattern, it is possible to execute the effect of changing the variable display result by executing the revival effect after the temporary stop state of the reach is off.

Next, an effect mode of the shutter effect executed at the 50th variation in the irregular jackpot or the low probability / high base state will be described. FIG. 9-43 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode of the shutter effect executed at the 50th variation in the irregular jackpot or the low probability / high base state. In addition, in FIG. 9-43, the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), (C) .... In the example shown in FIGS. 9-43, as an example, an effect mode of the shutter effect executed at the 50th variation in the low probability / high base state is shown.

As shown in FIG. 9-43 (A), in the low probability / high base state, for example, a character display 080IW031 such as "chance time" is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and a right-handed stroke is instructed. Right-handed display 080IW032 is displayed. Since the right-handed notification is being performed, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the variable display of the second special symbol.

Next, it is assumed that the fluctuation display of the 50th fluctuation in the low probability / high base state is started, and the fluctuation display of the 50th fluctuation is the fluctuation fluctuation display of the first special symbol. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-43 (B), the image display device 5 displays an image in which the upper and lower shutters 080IW033,034 are closed, the decorative design on the left, middle, and right is hidden, and the shutter effect is produced. It is started (see step 080IWS508). Then, as shown in FIGS. 9-43 (C) to (F), the upper and lower shutters 080IW033,034 are gradually opened, and the display is such that the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are gradually visible. Will be.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-43 (G), the upper and lower shutters 080IW033,034 are completely opened so that the decorative symbols on the left, middle and right can be completely seen, and the shutter effect is completed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-43 (G), the character display 080IW035 such as "normal mode" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the character display 080IW030 such as "Please return to left-handed" is displayed. , It is notified that it has returned to the low probability / low base state (normal state), and a display prompting the left-handed operation is performed.

9-44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the image data used in the shutter effect. Further, FIG. 9-45 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a method of displaying a still image used in the shutter effect. In this example, when the shutter effect is started, the moving image data in which the upper and lower shutters 080IW033,034 are gradually closed from the top and bottom is not reproduced, but the first as shown in FIG. 9-44 (A). A still image is displayed based on the still image data in the state where the upper and lower shutters 080IW033,034 are closed. In this case, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-43 (B) and 9-44 (A), the effect image 080IW037 is displayed in the vicinity of the upper and lower shutters 080IW033,034. Further, when the still image is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 9-45 (A) to 9-C, the still image is controlled to be vibrated in small steps in the vertical direction according to the passage of time T. By displaying in this way, in this example, a still image is actually displayed, but from the player's point of view, it gives the impression that the upper and lower shutters 080IW033,034 are closed instantly. I'm in control.

In this example, by controlling the display of still images as shown in FIGS. 9-43 (B) and 9-44 (A) in the shutter effect, for example, the upper and lower shutters 080IW033,034 are closed. The production process of the image data can be suppressed at a low cost as compared with the case of reproducing the moving image, and the decorative pattern can be quickly hidden because the effect of covering the display screen of the image display device 5 is achieved in an instant.

In this example, the effect image 080IW030 is displayed, or the still image is vibrated in the vertical direction in small steps to make the upper and lower shutters 080IW033,034 appear to be closed instantly. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, by outputting an effect sound as if the shutter was closed when displaying a still image, or by vibrating the accessory or operation button, it seems as if the upper and lower shutters 080IW033,034 were closed instantly. It may be configured as.

Then, after displaying the still image shown in FIGS. 9-44 (A), the moving image data shown in FIGS. 9-44 (B) to (C) is reproduced to reproduce the moving image data shown in FIGS. 9-43 (C) to (F). ), The upper and lower shutters 080IW033,034 are gradually opened.

In this example, for the effect of closing the upper and lower shutters 080IW033,034, a still image is used to hide the decorative pattern in an instant, while for the effect of opening the upper and lower shutters 080IW033,034, a moving image is reproduced. However, when the upper and lower shutters 080IW033,034 are opened, the fanfare effect and the effect while waiting for the gate to pass are executed, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is not already displayed, so it can be used in many frames. Even if the upper and lower shutters 080IW033,034 are gradually opened, there is no risk of misidentifying the variable display of the decorative pattern.

9-46 is an explanatory diagram showing the types of images displayed by the shutter effect. In this example, the shutter effect shown in FIGS. 9-43 is a case where an irregular jackpot occurs or a case where the fluctuation display of the 50th variation in the low probability / high base state is executed, but the low probability / high base state. When the shutter effect is executed in the variation display of the 50th variation of the above, the upper and lower shutters 080IW033,034 including the characters "END" are displayed as shown in FIG. 9-46 (A), and the shutter effect (time reduction) is displayed. Shutter effect for termination) is executed (see step 080IWS508). Further, when an irregular jackpot occurs when the gaming state is a low probability / low base state (normal state) or a low probability / high base state, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (B). The upper and lower shutters 080IW033,034 including the characters "waiting for intense heat" are displayed, and the shutter effect (normal / time saving shutter effect) is executed (see step 080IWS503, S512). If an irregular jackpot occurs when the game state is a high probability / low base state (second KT state), the upper and lower shutters 080IW033,034 including numbers are included as shown in FIG. 9-46 (C). Is displayed, and a shutter effect (shutter effect for small hit RUSH) accompanied by a count display is executed (see step 080IWS506).

Although not shown in FIGS. 9-46, if an irregular jackpot occurs when the game state is in the high probability / high base state, a shutter effect for the high probability / high base state is provided. Will be executed. In this case, for example, the upper and lower shutters 080IW033,034 including characters such as "Lowing" may be displayed to execute the shutter effect.

Next, the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol while the variation display of one special symbol is being executed will be described. FIG. 9-47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit, the variable display of the first special symbol is a probable variable jackpot (in this example, the first). In the case of a jackpot fluctuation that is a probability variation jackpot, a second probability variation jackpot, or a third probability variation jackpot), as shown in FIG. 9-47 (A), even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the first special symbol The variable display continues. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variation time timer is restarted (step 080IWS1120A, step 080IWS1120A, See step 080IWS1133A Y).

On the other hand, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation that is usually a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (B), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the first special symbol is displayed. The fluctuation display of is also forcibly stopped and displayed with an out-of-order symbol (see N in step 080IWS1133A and step 080IWS1134A).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol that is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (C). Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variation time timer is restarted (step 080IWS1120A, step 080IWS1120A, See step 080IWS1132A N).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit, the variable display of the second special symbol is a probable variable jackpot (in this example, the first). In the case of a jackpot fluctuation that is a probability variation jackpot, a second probability variation jackpot, or a third probability variation jackpot), as shown in FIG. 9-47 (D), even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol The variable display continues. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 080IWS1120B, step 080IWS1120B, See step 080IWS1133B Y).

On the other hand, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation that normally becomes a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (E), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol is displayed. The fluctuation display of is also forcibly stopped and displayed with an out-of-order symbol (see N in step 080IWS1133B and step 080IWS1134B).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol that is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (F), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 080IWS1120B, step 080IWS1120B, See step 080IWS1132B N).

The control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed is not limited to the mode shown in this example. Hereinafter, a modified example of the control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed will be described.

(Modification example 1)
FIG. 9-48 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first modification. In FIG. 9-48, the processes of steps 080IWS1120A to S1132A are the same as those processes shown in FIGS. 9-12, but in the first modification, the determination process of step 080IWS1133A shown in FIG. 9-12 does not exist. ..

In the first modification, if the variation display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 proceeds to the process of step S1134A as it is, and transmits the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120. (Step 080IWS1134A). In FIG. 9-48, the process of step 080IWS1135A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 9-12.

FIG. 9-49 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation processing in the first modification. In FIG. 9-49, the processes of steps 080IWS1120B to S1132B are the same as those processes shown in FIGS. 9-15, but in the first modification, the determination process of step 080IWS1133B shown in FIG. 9-15 does not exist. ..

In the first modification, if the variation display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 proceeds to the process of step S1134B as it is, and transmits the second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120. (Step 080IWS1134B). In FIG. 9-49, the process of step 080IWS1135B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 9-15.

FIG. 9-50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modified example 1.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that is the jackpot, is the fluctuation display of the first special symbol a jackpot fluctuation that is the probability variation jackpot? As shown in FIG. 9-50 (A), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly missed, regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is a normal jackpot. The stop display is displayed (see N in step 080IWS1132A and step 080IWS1134A).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol that is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 9-50 (B), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variation time timer is restarted (step 080IWS1120A, step 080IWS1120A, See step 080IWS1132A N).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the fluctuation display of the second special symbol a jackpot fluctuation that becomes a probability variation jackpot? As shown in FIG. 9-50 (C), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly missed, regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is a normal jackpot. The stop display is displayed (see N in step 080IWS1132B and step 080IWS1134B).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 9-50 (D). Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 080IWS1120B, step 080IWS1120B, See step 080IWS1132B N).

(Modification 2)
FIG. 9-51 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the second modification. In FIG. 9-51, the processing of steps 080IWS1120A to S1131A is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 9-12, but in the modified example 2, the determination processing of steps 080IWS1132A and S1133A shown in FIG. 9-12 is used. Instead, it includes the process of step 080IWS1132C.

In the second modification, if the variation display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1134A). In FIG. 9-51, the process of step 080IWS1135A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 9-12.

FIG. 9-52 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation processing in the second modification. In FIG. 9-52, the processes of steps 080IWS1120B to S1131B are the same as those processes shown in FIGS. 9-15, but in the second modification, the determination processes of steps 080IWS1132B and S1133B shown in FIGS. 9-15 are used. Instead, it includes the process of step 080IWS1132D.

In the second modification, if the variation display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1134B). In FIG. 9-52, the process of step 080IWS1135B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 9-15.

FIG. 9-53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modified example 2.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that is the jackpot, is the fluctuation display of the first special symbol a jackpot fluctuation that is the probability variation jackpot? As shown in FIG. 9-53 (A), the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is usually a jackpot. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variation time timer is restarted (step 080IWS1120A, step 080IWS1120A, See step 080IWS1132C Y).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol that is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 9-53 (B), When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see N in step 080IWS1132C and step 080IWS1134A).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the fluctuation display of the second special symbol a jackpot fluctuation that becomes a probability variation jackpot? As shown in FIG. 9-53 (C), the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is usually a jackpot. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 080IWS1120B, step 080IWS1120B, See step 080IWS1132D Y).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 9-53 (D). When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see N in step 080IWS1132D and step 080IWS1134B).

Further, as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol, other than those shown in the modification 1 and the modification 2, for example, the deviation is lost. If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the forced loss is stopped, while the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that is a small hit is performed. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation may be continued.

Further, for example, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the normal state (low probability / low base state), the fluctuation display of the second special symbol being executed is off and fluctuates. Either the small hit fluctuation or the big hit fluctuation may be configured to stop forcibly. With such a configuration, in this example, if the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed in the low probability / high base state, the transition to the low probability / low base state is performed (see FIG. 9-24), but 50 times. When 1 to 4 second hold memories are accumulated when the fluctuation display is finished and the state shifts to the low probability / low base state, and if there is a second hold memory that becomes a big hit, it is forcibly stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent a big hit at an unintended timing. Further, in particular, in a game machine configured to be controllable to a KT state as in this example, by performing a right-handed operation in a normal state (low probability / low base state), a second start winning opening that is easy to start winning can be obtained. It is also possible to make a start prize and display the variation of the second special symbol, and at the same time, let the first start prize opening win the start and display the variation of the first special symbol. It is effective as a preventive measure for the method.

As described above, various modes can be considered as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed.

(Modification 3)
In addition, the feature unit 080IW controls to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol by the same control in the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol. Although the case (see FIGS. 9-47) is shown, different controls may be used. FIG. 9-54 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation processing in the modified example 3. In the modified example 3, the first special symbol variation process is the same as the process shown in FIGS. 9-12. In FIG. 9-54, the processes of steps 080IWS1120B to S1130B are the same as those processes shown in FIGS. 9-15, but in the modified example 3, the determination process of steps 080IWS1131B to S1133B shown in FIG. 9-15 is performed. not exist. Therefore, in the third modification, unless the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (N in step 080IWS1130B), the CPU 103 ends the process as it is.

FIG. 9-55 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modified example 3.

As shown in FIGS. 9-55 (A) and 9-55 (C), in the modified example 3, a small hit is displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a miss, a small hit, or a probability variation big hit. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, as in FIGS. 9-47 (A) and 9-47 (C). Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-55 (D) and 9-55 (F), the small hit symbol is stopped in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol which is a miss, a small hit, or a probabilistic big hit. When it is displayed, similarly to FIGS. 9-47 (D) and 9-47 (F), the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-55 (B), in the modified example 3, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which is usually a big hit. In the same manner as in FIG. 9-47 (B), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as an off symbol.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-55 (E), in the modified example 3, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol which is usually a big hit. In, unlike FIG. 9-47 (E), the variation display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 9-55, in the modified example 3, the variation display of the special symbol is forcibly removed and forced by the symbol when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. The control to display the stop is different.

In the third modification, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, which is a normal jackpot, the small hit symbol is forcibly stopped and stopped, while the normal jackpot is normally hit. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display is continued, but it is limited to such a mode. Absent. For example, conversely, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, which is a normal jackpot, the fluctuation display is continued, while the normal jackpot is displayed. If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, it may be configured to forcibly stop. Also, for example, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol which is a big hit (regardless of whether it is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot), the forced loss is lost. On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit (regardless of whether it is a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot), it changes. It may be configured to continue the display. In this way, the control for forced loss stop may be different between the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in some form.

(Modification example 4)
FIG. 9-56 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the modified example 4. In FIGS. 9-56, the processes of steps 080IWS1120A to S1133A are similar to those processes shown in FIGS. 9-12.

In the modified example 4, when the variation display of the first special symbol that does not become a first probability variation jackpot, a second probability variation jackpot, or a third probability variation jackpot (that is, a normal jackpot) is being executed in step 080IWS1133A. , CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 080IWS1131A). If the probability change flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probability change state), the process ends as it is. If the probability change flag is set (that is, if it is in the probability change state), the CPU 103 controls to send the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1134A). The process of step 080IWS1135A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 9-12.

In the fourth modification, when the determination process of step 080IWS1131A is executed, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which is usually a big hit. The variation display of the first special symbol is not uniformly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol, but the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol when the probability change state is in progress. On the other hand, even during the variable display of the first special symbol, which is usually a big hit, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed unless it is in the probability variation state.

FIG. 9-57 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation processing in the modified example 4. In FIGS. 9-57, the processes of steps 080IWS1120B to S1133B are similar to those processes shown in FIGS. 9-15.

In the modified example 4, when the variation display of the first special symbol that does not become a first probability variation jackpot, a second probability variation jackpot, or a third probability variation jackpot (that is, a normal jackpot) is being executed in step 080IWS1133B , CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 080IWS1131B). If the probability change flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probability change state), the process ends as it is. If the probability change flag is set (that is, if it is in the probability change state), the CPU 103 controls to send the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1134B). The process of step 080IWS1135B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 9-15.

In the fourth modification, when the determination process of step 080IWS1131B is executed, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol which is usually a big hit. The variation display of the second special symbol is not uniformly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol, but the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol when the probability change state is in progress. On the other hand, even during the variable display of the second special symbol, which is usually a big hit, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, unless it is in the probability variation state.

In the modified example 4, a case is shown in which control is performed to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol depending on whether or not the probability change flag is set (whether or not it is in the probability change state), but only in such a mode. I can't. For example, it may be configured to perform control to forcibly stop and display the off-target symbol depending on whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set. Further, for example, the control may be configured to forcibly stop and display the off symbol only when the high probability / low base state (high probability flag is on and high base flag is off). In this way, any form may be used as long as it is configured to forcibly control the stop display with a detached symbol according to the current gaming state.

In addition, when the control is configured to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol only in the high probability / low base state as described above, it is possible to prevent a normal big hit in the variable display of one of the identification information. It is possible to prevent the second KT state (small hit RUSH) from being interrupted.

(Modification 5)
Further, in this example, depending on whether the left-handed operation is performed or the right-handed operation is performed, the decorative symbol is displayed corresponding to the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is displayed corresponding to the second special symbol. While switching whether to display the decorative symbol, the case where both the first small symbol and the second small symbol are continuously displayed is shown, but it depends on whether the left-handed operation is performed or the right-handed operation is performed. Depending on the presence, the display of the first small symbol or the display of the second small symbol may be switched.

FIG. 9-58 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a mode of switching the display of the decorative symbol in the modified example 5. In FIG. 9-58, the mode of switching the decorative symbol is the same as the mode shown in FIGS. 9-42. In this example, as shown in the left column of FIG. 9-58 (1) and the right column of FIG. 9-58 (2), the state is controlled to the low probability / low base state (normal state) and the left-handed operation is performed. In the case of, the second small symbol display area 080IW012 is erased based on the reception of the right-handed lighting end designation command, and only the display of the first small symbol in the first small symbol display area 080IW011 is displayed. The state can be switched. Further, as shown in the right column of FIG. 9-58 (1), the left column of FIG. 9-58 (2), and FIG. 9-58 (3), the right column is controlled to a high probability state or a high base state. When the striking operation is performed, the first small symbol display area 080IW011 is erased and the second small symbol is displayed in the second small symbol display area 080IW012 based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command. You can switch to the state where only is displayed.

(Modification 6)
In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, the right-handed lighting start designation command is not transmitted, but the right-handed lighting start designation command is transmitted. You may. FIG. 9-59 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing in the modified example 6. In the modified example 6, the processes of steps 080IWS2010A to S2027A are the same as those processes shown in FIGS. 9-13.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 080IWS2028A). If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 controls to send a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS2030A). The processes of steps 080IWS2031A to S2032A are the same as those processes shown in FIGS. 9-13.

Further, in the modification 6, since the right-handed lighting start designation command is transmitted even when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, the figure is shown when the small hit game is finished. In the small hit end processing shown in 9-22, the same processing as in step 080IWS2307 is executed, and a right-handed lighting end designation command is transmitted.

FIG. 9-60 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step 080IWS205) in the modification 6. In the modified example 6, the processes of steps 080IWS611 to S639, S640 to S643, and S644 to S672 are the same as those processes shown in FIGS. 9-27 to 9-30.

If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting start designation command (step 080IWS639), the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the small hit game state by confirming the small hit symbol in the variation display of the first special symbol. It is confirmed whether or not this is the case (step 080IWS639X). Whether or not the small hit symbol is confirmed and controlled in the small hit game state in the variation display of the first special symbol is determined by, for example, receiving the small hit start designation command and the first. 1 It can be determined by confirming whether or not the small hit symbol is definitely displayed as the stop symbol of the small symbol. If the small hit symbol is confirmed and controlled in the small hit game state in the variation display of the first special symbol (Y in step 080IWS639X), the step 080IWS640 to S642 is not executed as it is. Move to 080IWS611.

If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting end designation command (step 080IWS643), the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the small hit game state by confirming the small hit symbol in the variation display of the first special symbol. It is confirmed whether or not this is the case (step 080IWS643X). If the small hit symbol is confirmed and controlled in the small hit game state in the variation display of the first special symbol (Y in step 080IWS643X), the steps 080IWS644 to S649 are not executed and the steps are taken as they are. Move to 080IWS611.

According to the modification 6, even if the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, the right-handed lighting start designation command is transmitted, and the variation display of the first special symbol is displayed on the effect control CPU 120 side. Is executed to determine that it is a small hit and control is performed so that the right-handed notification is not performed, and whether the decorative symbol is displayed corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Is controlled so as not to switch.

As described above, according to the feature unit 080IW, the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are performed in parallel. Is feasible. In addition, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is different from the advantageous state, and it is possible to control a non-special state (for example, a low hit game state). It is possible to control a special state (for example, a KT state) that is more frequently controlled to a special state than a probability / low base state (normal state). Further, as the special state, it is possible to control the first special state (for example, the first KT state) and the second special state (for example, the second KT state) which is more advantageous than the first special state, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. It is possible to control to the second special state based on what has been done (for example, the third probability variation jackpot has been reached, and the fluctuation display of 50 or 100 times has been completed in the high probability / high base state (first KT state)). is there. Further, when the control is performed in the non-special state and the control is performed in an advantageous state based on the variable display of the second identification information, the variable display of the second identification information is performed when the control is performed in the second special state. It is more difficult to satisfy a predetermined condition than when it is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-23, a first probability variation jackpot or a second probability variation jackpot during a high probability / low base state (second KT state)). Is immediately controlled to a high probability / low base state (second KT state), whereas a first probability variation jackpot or a second probability variation jackpot occurs during the low probability / low base state (normal state). If this is the case, it is controlled to a high probability / high base state (first KT state), and then it is controlled to a high probability / low base state (second KT state) when the fluctuation display of 50 or 100 times is completed). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game when the special state is controlledly configured.

In particular, in this example, since the left-handed operation period is in progress during the low probability / low base state (normal state), a big hit usually occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol. Therefore, the big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state (normal state) because the second reserved memory remaining after finishing the high probability / low base state (second KT state) becomes the big hit. In the case of a low probability / low base state (normal state), a right-handed operation is intentionally performed to execute the variable display of the second special symbol, and a big hit occurs, which should hardly occur in the first place. Is. In this example, if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed during the low probability / low base state (normal state) and a big hit occurs, the high probability / high probability after the fluctuation display of 100 times or 50 times is completed. By providing a case where the game is controlled to a low base state (second KT state), a penalty is given to an aggressive operation such as performing a right-handed operation in such a normal state, and the interest in the game is reduced. It is possible to suppress it.

In this example, as a specific example of the case where "the predetermined condition is difficult to be satisfied", the high probability / low base state (second KT state) is immediately controlled to the high probability / low base state (second KT state) (2nd KT state). That is, the high probability / low base state (second KT state) is set when the fluctuation display of 50 times or 100 times is completed in the low probability / low base state (normal state), while the high base number is 0 times). The case of being controlled (ie, high base count 50 or 100) has been shown, but is not limited to such a mode. For example, even if a big hit occurs in the high probability / low base state (second KT state), it is once controlled to the high probability / high base state (first KT state), and a relatively small number of 10 or 30 fluctuation displays are displayed. When it ends, it is controlled to the high probability / low base state (second KT state), whereas in the low probability / low base state (normal state), when the fluctuation display of 50 times or 100 times, which is a relatively large number of times, is finished. It may be configured to be controlled to a high probability / low base state (second KT state). In this way, the time it takes for the low probability / low base state (normal state) to shift to the high probability / low base state (second KT state) rather than the high probability / low base state (second KT state) in some form. It suffices if it is configured so that it is difficult to shift to the high probability / low base state (second KT state) due to such factors.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-23, 50 fluctuations are displayed when the first probability variation jackpot or the second probability variation jackpot occurs even in the low probability / high base state or the high probability / high base state. High probability / low base state (2nd KT state) after the end of Although the case where it is configured so as to make it difficult to shift to the state (the second KT state) is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, even during the low probability / high base state, the right-handed operation period is in progress and the penalty factor is low. Therefore, as in the high probability / low base state, the high probability / low base state ( It may be configured to control to the second KT state).

Further, according to the present feature unit 080IW, when the second special state is controlled and the first identification information is controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display, the second special state is controlled when the first identification information is controlled to the non-special state. 1 The predetermined condition is more likely to be satisfied than when the identification information is controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-23, the first state during the low probability / low base state (normal state)). When a probability variation jackpot or a second probability variation jackpot occurs, it is controlled to a high probability / high base state (first KT state), and then when 50 or 100 fluctuation displays are completed, a high probability / low base state (first state) is completed. While controlled to the 2KT state), if the first probability variation jackpot or the second probability variation jackpot occurs during the high probability / low base state (second KT state), the high probability / low base state (second KT state) is immediately established. (State) is controlled, and as shown in FIG. 9-3, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the selection ratio of the first probability variation jackpot and the second probability variation jackpot is high). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to lose his interest.

In particular, if a big hit occurs again in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting from the low probability / low base state (normal state) to the high probability / low base state (second KT state), the first It may be a probability variation jackpot or a second probability variation jackpot, and in this case, it ends the high probability / low base state (second KT state) and shifts to the high probability / high base state (first KT state) like a penalty. If this happens, the player may feel disappointed. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-23, during the high probability / low base state (second KT state), the high probability / low base state (second KT state) is immediately obtained even in the first probability variation jackpot and the second probability variation jackpot. It is designed to prevent such disappointment. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to lose his interest in the case of an irregular jackpot.

In this example, during the high probability / low base state (second KT state), the first probability variation jackpot and the second probability variation jackpot are immediately controlled to the high probability / low base state (second KT state). It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, during the high probability / low base state (second KT state), when the first probability variation jackpot or the second probability variation jackpot is reached, a relatively small number of 10 or 30 fluctuation displays are completed, and the high probability / low base It may be configured to be controlled by a state (second KT state), and may be configured so as to "easily satisfy a predetermined condition" in some form.

Further, according to the present feature unit 080IW, it is possible to set one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") having different advantages for the player. Further, when the set value has a low advantage (for example, the set value "1"), the predetermined condition is more likely to be satisfied than when the set value has a high advantage. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, since the jackpot probability is the lowest at the set value "1", the jackpot will be a jackpot in the high probability / high base state (first KT state) 50. It is easy to execute up to 100 times or 100 times of fluctuation display, and it is easy to shift to a high probability / low base state (second KT state). Therefore, even when the setting value has a low advantage, expectations can be raised and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the feature unit 080IW, when the gaming state is switched (for example, when an irregular jackpot occurs, or when the 50th variation display in the low probability / high base state is executed), the predetermined display (for example, For example, it is possible to execute a special effect (for example, a shutter effect) that makes it difficult to see the decorative pattern on the left, middle, and right. As a special effect, it is difficult to visually recognize a predetermined display by displaying a specific image (for example, a still image in a state where the upper and lower shutters 080IW033,034 shown in FIGS. 9-43 (B) and 9-44 (A) are closed). After executing the effect of, the specific image is separated and the predetermined display becomes visible (for example, FIGS. 9-43 (C) to (F) and 9-44 (B), (C)). The upper and lower shutters 080IW033,034 shown are gradually opened (moving image). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly hide the predetermined display and switch the display with a simple display in the special effect. In addition, it is possible to save the video production period and production cost required for the special production.

Further, according to this feature unit 080IW, when the gaming state is switched (for example, when an irregular jackpot occurs, or when the fluctuation display of the 50th variation in the low probability / high base state is executed), the specific image ( For example, a predetermined display (for example, a decorative pattern on the left, middle, and right) is displayed by displaying a still image in a state where the upper and lower shutters 080IW033,034 shown in FIGS. 9-43 (B) and 9-44 (A) are closed. It is possible to perform a special effect (for example, a shutter effect) that makes it difficult to see. Further, a plurality of types of specific images (for example, still images shown in FIGS. 9-46 (A) to (C)) can be displayed, and different types of specific images are displayed depending on the gaming state when controlled to an advantageous state. (For example, when the shutter effect is executed in the variation display of the 50th variation in the low probability / high base state, the upper and lower parts including the character "END" are included as shown in FIG. 9-46 (A). When the shutter 080IW033,034 is displayed and an irregular jackpot occurs when the gaming state is a low probability / low base state (normal state) or a low probability / high base state, FIG. 9-46 ( As shown in B), the upper and lower shutters 080IW033,034 including the characters "waiting for intense heat" are displayed, and an irregular jackpot occurs when the game state is a high probability / low base state (second KT state). In this case, the upper and lower shutters 080IW033,034 including numbers are displayed as shown in FIG. 9-46 (C)). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly hide the predetermined display and switch the display with a simple display in the special effect. In addition, it is possible to save the video production period and production cost required for the special production.

Further, for example, when a normal big hit occurs during a high probability / high base state or a high probability / low base state, the probability variation state ends or the second KT state (small hit RUSH) ends. Although it is not always in an advantageous state because it may end up, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (C), a shutter effect with a count display or a shutter effect including characters such as "Lowing" is executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly agitated.

Further, according to this feature unit 080IW, it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state, and a special state (for example, high probability / low base) in which a game value is easily given by the special state. It is possible to control the state (second KT state). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value is easily given by the special state.

Further, according to the feature unit 080IW, it is possible to execute the variable display of the effect identification information (for example, the decorative symbol) corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information. Further, in response to the transition of the gaming state, a special image (for example, shutter effect image 080IW017) is displayed in the display area for executing the variable display of the effect identification information, and the visibility of the effect identification information is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a sense of discomfort between the effect identification information and the game state at the timing of the transition of the game state.

Further, according to the feature unit 080IW, it is possible to control to a predetermined state (for example, a high base state) in which the execution frequency of the variable display of the second identification information is increased as compared with the non-predetermined state (for example, a low base state). , A special effect (for example, a shutter effect image 080IW017 shown in FIGS. 9-41) for displaying a special image (for example, the shutter effect image 080IW017 shown in FIGS. 9-41) for notifying that the game state is changed with high visibility when shifting from the predetermined state to the non-predetermined state ( For example, the shutter effect) is executed, and when the special effect is executed, the effect identification information is hidden. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a sense of discomfort between the effect identification information and the game state when shifting from the predetermined state to the non-predetermined state, and to reduce the processing load related to the display of the effect identification information.

Further, according to this feature unit 080IW, it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state, and a special state (for example, high probability / low base) in which a game value is easily given by the special state. It is possible to control the state (second KT state). Further, the transition effect (for example, the shutter effect) can be executed when the state is controlled to the special state after the end of the advantageous state, and the effect identification information is hidden and controlled when the transition effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a sense of discomfort between the effect identification information and the game state when the effect identification information is controlled to the special state after the end of the advantageous state, and to reduce the processing load related to the display of the effect identification information.

Further, according to the feature unit 080IW, the non-display control of the effect identification information is started in response to the transition of the gaming state, and the effect is produced based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the start of the variable display of the next decorative symbol). The control of hiding the identification information is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to display the effect identification information again while preventing a feeling of strangeness between the effect identification information and the game state.

In this example, a case is shown in which the display of the decorative symbol or the hold display is restarted based on the start of the variable display of the next decorative symbol as a predetermined condition, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, based on the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) from the start of hiding the decorative symbol or hold display, the display of the decorative symbol or hold display is resumed assuming that the predetermined condition is satisfied. It may be configured.

Further, according to the feature unit 080IW, the information related to the variable display can be stored as the hold storage, the hold display can be displayed corresponding to the hold storage, and the hold display is not displayed during the non-display control of the effect identification information. Display state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display of the hold display in addition to the processing load related to the display of the effect identification information.

Further, according to the feature unit 080IW, it is possible to execute variable display of the reduced identification information (for example, small symbols (first small symbol, second small symbol)) in a reduced mode of the effect identification information, and the effect identification information. The reduced identification information is displayed regardless of whether or not the non-display control of is in progress. Therefore, it is possible to recognize the game situation even during the non-display control of the effect identification information.

Further, according to the feature unit 080IW, when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol), it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state). Further, when the non-display control of the effect identification information is terminated, a combination of the effect identification information of the display result different from the specific display result is displayed (for example, as shown in the right column of FIG. 9-42 (2)). Switch the decorative pattern to the initial result and display it). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the control is performed in an advantageous state.

Further, according to the feature unit 080IW, after executing the variable display of the effect identification information in response to the variable display of the first identification information, a specific condition (for example, transition to a probability variation state or a high base state) is satisfied. Based on this, the variable display of the effect identification information is executed corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information. In addition, it corresponds to the variable display of the first identification information based on the fact that the special condition (for example, the final fluctuation in the low probability / high base state (for example, the 50th fluctuation) is executed) is satisfied after the specific condition is satisfied. The variable display of the effect identification information is executed. In addition, the display result is different from the display result of the variable display of the effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information when the specific condition is satisfied, and the variable display of the first identification information when the special condition is satisfied is supported. The display result of the variable display of the effect identification information is displayed (for example, as shown in the right column of FIG. 9-42 (2), the decorative pattern is displayed by switching to the initial appearance). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game situation is misunderstood.

Further, according to the feature unit 080IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of gaming states (for example, a jackpot gaming state, a probability variation state, and a high base state). Further, the variable display of the first special identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second special identification information (for example, the second special symbol) can be executed, and the variable display of the first special identification information can be performed. The first effect variable display that executes the variable display of the effect identification information (for example, the decorative pattern) correspondingly, and the second effect variable display that executes the variable display of the effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the second special identification information. Either one of the displays can be executed as a variable display. Further, based on the reception of the state transition information (for example, the right-handed lighting start designation command and the right-handed lighting end designation command) corresponding to the transition of the game state, the first effect variable display and the second effect variable display are displayed. Switching the variable display from one of them to the other (for example, switching to the display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, and receiving the right-handed lighting end designation command. Switch to the display of the decorative design corresponding to the first special design based on this). Therefore, it is possible to switch the variable display from one of the first effect variable display and the second effect variable display to the other based on the reception of the state transition information, so that the processing load of the effect control can be reduced. it can.

For example, as shown in this example, in a gaming machine in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are used. In order to switch which of the decorative symbols is displayed, it is necessary to monitor both the fluctuation state of the first special symbol and the fluctuation state of the second special symbol, which imposes a processing load on the effect control CPU 120 side. There is a risk that the number will increase and it will not be possible to smoothly switch the display of decorative patterns. Therefore, in this example, the display of the decorative symbol is switched based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command and the right-handed lighting end designation command transmitted in connection with the change in the game state. It prevents the situation where the processing load is unnecessarily applied to the effect control CPU 120 side, and makes it possible to smoothly switch the display of the decorative pattern.

In this example, the display of the decorative symbol is switched based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command and the right-handed lighting end designation command as the state transition information, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, if a background specification command that can specify the game state is configured to be transmitable, the game state may be determined based on the reception of the background specification command as state transition information, and the display of the decorative symbol may be switched. Good. Further, for example, when a game state specification command capable of specifying the game state itself is configured to be transmitable, the game state is determined based on the reception of the game state specification command as state transition information, and the display of the decorative symbol is switched. It may be configured as follows. As such, various modes can be considered as the state transition information.

Further, according to the feature unit 080IW, the variable display of the first special identification information and the variable display of the second special identification information can be executed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load especially when the variable display of the first special identification information and the variable display of the second special identification information can be executed in parallel.

In this example, the case where the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are configured to be executable in parallel is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, in a gaming machine configured to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in the order of winning the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, the feature unit 080IW indicates. The configuration may be applied. Further, for example, in a gaming machine configured to execute the variable display of the second special symbol with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol, the configuration shown by the feature unit 080IW may be applied.

Further, according to the present feature unit 080IW, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is different from the advantageous state. , It is possible to control to a special state (for example, high probability / low base state (second KT state)) in which the game value is easily given by the special state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value is easily given by the special state.

Further, according to the modification 5 of the feature unit 080IW, it is possible to execute the variable display of the reduced identification information (for example, the small symbol (first small symbol, second small symbol)) in the reduced mode of the effect identification information. , Supports the first reduced variable display that executes the variable display of the reduced identification information in response to the variable display of the first special identification information and the variable display of the second special identification information based on the reception of the state transition information. The variable display is switched from one of the second reduced variable display to the other (see, for example, FIG. 9-58). Therefore, by making it possible to switch the variable display of the reduced identification information in response to the state transition information, it is possible to further reduce the processing load of the effect control.

Further, according to the feature unit 080IW, the special identification information (for example, the fourth symbol) having lower visibility than the effect identification information is variably displayed by the variable display mode different from the effect identification information, and the state transition information is executed. The variable display of the special identification information is executed regardless of whether or not the special identification information is received. Therefore, even if the variable display of the effect identification information is switched, the game situation can be recognized.

Further, according to the present feature unit 080IW, as state transition information, a game medium (for example, a game ball) is launched into a predetermined area (for example, a right area of the game area) in the game area. Based on the reception of predetermined operation information (for example, a right-handed lighting start designation command) indicating that, the variable display is switched from one of the first effect variable display and the second effect variable display to the other (for example,). Switch to the display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command). Therefore, it is possible to use both the information indicating the situation in which the game medium is launched and the information corresponding to the transition of the game state, and it is possible to reduce the storage area of the information.

Further, according to the feature unit 080IW, the given game value (for example, the number of prize balls) is totaled. In addition, the aggregation of the game value is started based on the reception of the predetermined operation information, and the game medium is launched into a specific area (for example, the left area of the game area) other than the predetermined area in the game area. The aggregation of the game value is terminated based on the receipt of the specific operation information (for example, the right-handed lighting end designation command) indicating the situation. Therefore, it is possible to manage the aggregation of the game value triggered by the reception of information indicating the situation in which the game medium is launched.

Further, according to the feature unit 080IW, a special image (for example, shutter effect image 080IW017) is displayed in a display area for executing variable display of the effect identification information in response to the transition of the gaming state, and the effect identification information is visually recognized. Decrease sex. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a sense of discomfort between the effect identification information and the game state at the timing of the transition of the game state.

Further, according to the feature unit 080IW, after executing the variable display of the effect identification information in response to the variable display of the first special identification information, a specific condition (for example, transition to a probability variation state or a high base state) is satisfied. Based on the above, the variable display of the effect identification information is executed corresponding to the variable display of the second special identification information. In addition, it corresponds to the variable display of the first special identification information based on the fact that the special condition (for example, the final fluctuation in the low probability / high base state (for example, the 50th fluctuation) is executed) is satisfied after the specific condition is satisfied. The variable display of the effect identification information is executed. In addition, the variable display of the first special identification information when the special condition is satisfied is different from the display result of the variable display of the effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first special identification information when the specific condition is satisfied. The display result of the variable display of the effect identification information corresponding to the above is displayed (for example, as shown in the right column of FIG. 9-42 (2), the decorative pattern is displayed by switching to the initial appearance). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game situation is misunderstood.

Further, according to the feature unit 080IW, it is possible to control to a predetermined state (for example, a high base state) in which the execution frequency of the variable display of the second special identification information is increased as compared with the non-predetermined state. Therefore, by providing a predetermined state in which the execution frequency of the variable display of the second special identification information is increased, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the present feature unit 080IW, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) which is advantageous for the player, and it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. , State transition information (for example, right-handed lighting start specification command, right-handed lighting end specification command) is transmitted. In addition, state transition information is not transmitted when controlled to a special state in a non-predetermined state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unnecessary execution of the variable display switching control of the effect identification information and reduce the processing load of the effect control.

Further, according to the modification 6 of the feature unit 080IW, the state transition information is transmitted even when the special state is controlled in the non-predetermined state. Further, even if the state transition information is received, if it is controlled to a special state in a non-predetermined state, the first effect variable display and the second effect variable display are not switched. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an increase in the control load on the information transmitting side, prevent unnecessary execution of the variable display switching control of the effect identification information, and reduce the processing load of the effect control.

Further, according to the feature unit 080IW, the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel. , When a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and the variable display display result is special. When the display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed, it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Further, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and the one in which the first specific display result is derived and displayed is better. It is more advantageous for the player than the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, it is controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game is completed). Further, while the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is the variable display corresponding to the first specific display result, the special display result is displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. The display result of the variable display of one of the identification information is not derived and displayed (for example, the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the first special symbol or the first special symbol or the first is not displayed. 2 The variable display of the special symbol is continuously executed). Further, during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information. Based on the derivation display, the variable display of the identification information of one of them is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is an outlier symbol). Forcibly stopped and displayed). Therefore, it is possible to realize control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

Specifically, when the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold of one of the identification information results in a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) even though the transition to the second KT state (small hit RUSH) or probability variation state has occurred. The second KT state (small hit RUSH) or the probabilistic state will end immediately, and there is a risk that the interest in the game will decline. On the other hand, if the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold of the identification information on one side is forcibly forcibly removed and the symbol is stopped and displayed (forced off), even the variable display that is a probable change jackpot will be forcibly removed. As a result, the game value given to the player in the advantageous state (big hit game state) is reduced, which is not preferable. Therefore, in this feature unit 080IW, while the fluctuation display that is a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) is forcibly removed, the fluctuation display that is a probability variation jackpot is extended (interruption of measurement of fluctuation time). , While suppressing the decrease in the game value given to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In this example, as an aspect of "not stopping the variable display of one of the identification information", the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed. Has been shown, but is not limited to such a mode. For example, the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is interrupted (paused), and the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that was interrupted after the end of the small hit game is resumed. You may. Anything that does not completely stop the variable display in some form is sufficient.

Further, according to the feature unit 080IW, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, the second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) due to the special state is easily given. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value is easily given by the special state.

Further, according to the present feature unit 080IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change)) that is different from the advantageous state and is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state as compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). The state)) can be controlled. Further, the first specific display result is controlled to a specific state based on the derivation display (for example, the probability change state is controlled after the end of the big hit game based on the probability change big hit), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed. Based on this, it is controlled to a non-specific state (for example, it is not controlled to a probabilistic state after the end of a big hit game based on a normal big hit). Therefore, it is possible to realize control considering whether or not it is controlled to a specific state.

Further, according to the feature unit 080IW, the special display result can be derived and displayed regardless of whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (). 9-1 and 9-2). Further, the first identification is based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result in the variable display of the first identification information. The variable display of information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (see FIG. 9-55 (B)). Further, when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result in the variable display of the second identification information, the second identification information is displayed. Control is not performed to derive and display the variable display of the above with a predetermined display result (see FIG. 9-55 (E)). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control considering whether the first identification information is the variable display or the second identification information is the variable display.

Further, according to the present feature unit 080IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change)) that is different from the advantageous state and is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state as compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). The state)) can be controlled. Further, the variable display executing means is a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, and is a variable display corresponding to the second specific display result when controlled to the specific state. Based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with the predetermined display result (FIGS. 9-56, 9-). 57). Further, when controlled to the non-specific state, during execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the other identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (see FIGS. 9-56 and 9-57). ). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control considering whether or not the control is performed in a specific state.

Further, according to the feature unit 080IW, the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is based on the fact that the game medium (for example, the game ball) has entered the first start area (for example, the first start winning opening). ) Can be variably displayed, and the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is variably displayed based on the entry of the game medium into the second starting area (for example, the second starting winning opening). It is possible. Further, a variable means (for example, a special variable prize) that can be changed into a first state in which the game medium can enter (for example, an open state) and a second state in which the game medium cannot enter or cannot enter (for example, a closed state). A ball device 17) is provided. Further, after the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is executed, an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state) and a special state having a lower advantage than the advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) For example, it can be controlled to either the small hit game state), and the variable means is controlled to the first state when it is controlled to the special state. Further, the first starting area is provided so that the game medium moving on a predetermined path (for example, the left area of the game area) can enter the moving path in which the game medium can move, and the variable means is out of the moving path. A game medium that moves on a specific route (for example, the area to the right of the game area) is provided so as to be accessible. Further, it is possible to execute a specific notification (for example, a right-handed notification shown in FIGS. 9-40 (1) and (2)) for promoting the launch of the game medium to the specific route, and the first identification information is variably displayed. When the special state is controlled after the execution of, the specific notification is not executed (see, for example, FIG. 9-40 (3)). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the promotion of the launch of the game medium.

Further, according to the feature unit 080IW, the first reserved storage means (for example, the first reserved storage buffer) capable of storing the information regarding the variable display of the first identification information as the reserved storage and the variable display of the second identification information The information is provided as a second hold storage means (for example, a second hold storage buffer) that can be stored as hold storage. Further, when the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information or the display result of the variable display of the second identification information, the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) is set. It is controllable, and when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or a display result of the variable display of the second identification information, a special state (for example, a small hit symbol) is displayed. It is possible to control the small hit game state). Further, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which the frequency at which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information becomes the special display result is increased. Further, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed as the display result of one of the variable displays when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel. As the display result of the other variable display, a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) different from the specific display result and the special display result is derived and displayed. Therefore, the variable display can be forcibly terminated, and the reserved memory can be smoothly digested.

Further, according to the feature unit 080IW, a predetermined value can be given when the special state is controlled (for example, 10 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening). It is possible to give a value higher than a predetermined value when controlled to an advantageous state (for example, 15 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of a game ball to the big winning opening). Further, as the specific notification, the first specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 shown in FIGS. 9-40 (1) and (2)) and the first specific notification are more visible than the first specific notification. It is possible to execute a highly likely second specific notification (for example, the right-handed display 080IW007 shown in FIG. 9-40 (1)). When controlled to an advantageous state, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are executed (see FIG. 9-40 (1)), and after the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the special state is controlled. At that time, the first specific notification is executed and the second specific notification is not executed (see FIG. 9-40 (2)). Therefore, it is possible to realize the notification corresponding to the value that can be given.

Further, according to the feature unit 080IW, it is possible to execute a variable display effect (for example, variable display of a decorative pattern) at least corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information. In addition, it is possible to execute a variable display effect of a common mode when it is controlled to a special state and when it is not controlled to a special state (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained. , Forcibly stop and display the non-reach off symbol). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's recognition of being controlled to a special state after the variable display of the first identification information is executed. In addition, the reserved memory stored by the second reserved storage means can be smoothly digested.

Further, according to the feature unit 080IW, a delay means for delaying the movement of the game medium (for example, a regulation piece provided in the variable winning ball device 6B) is provided on the upstream side of the variable means in the specific route. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second identification information from being targeted at the timing when the control to the special state is executed after the variable display of the second identification information is executed at the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to strengthen the capture measures against the game machine.

The delay means is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a passage member for moving the game ball so as to meander left and right is provided as a delay means on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 provided on the right side of the game area. You may.

Further, according to the feature unit 080IW, the effect is produced based on the game control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) and the information from the game control means. It includes an effect control means for controlling (for example, an effect control CPU 120). Further, the game control means controls the execution of the notification by the notification means (for example, the right-handed display 26) that performs a predetermined notification. Further, the effect control means executes a specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed notification LED 37) in response to the notification by the notification means. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification while reducing the processing load of the effect control means.

In this example, right-handed notification is executed during the jackpot game regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Cases are shown, but not limited to such aspects. For example, a special variable winning ball device (left large winning opening) is provided on the left side of the game area, and a special variable winning ball device (right large winning opening) is also provided on the right side of the game area. If a big hit is made by the variable display of the symbol, the left big winning opening is opened during the big hit game, and if a big hit is made by the variable display of the second special symbol, the right big winning opening is opened during the big hit game. When applied to a game machine configured as described above, if a big hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, a right-handed notification is executed during the big hit game, while the variable display of the first special symbol is used. If a big hit occurs, the right-handed notification may not be executed during the big hit game. Further, in the case of such a configuration, if a jackpot is obtained in the variable display of the first special symbol, the left-handed notification may be executed during the jackpot game. That is, the specific notification executing means may be configured to execute the specific notification when the variable means (in this example, the right-handed winning opening) is controlled to an advantageous state of the type to be controlled. With such a configuration, when a big hit is obtained in the variable display of the first special symbol, a left-handed notification is executed during the big-hit game to prevent the player from accidentally performing a right-handed operation. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player.

Further, in this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, a case where right-handed notification is executed even during the KT state is shown. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, when the second start winning opening is applied to a game machine provided on the left side of the game area, the right-handed notification is not executed during the KT state, the high base state, or the time saving state. May be good.

Further, in this example, in addition to lighting the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 only during the big hit game, right-handed notification is executed by displaying the right-handed display 080IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, even in the second KT state (during small hit RUSH), when executing the first variation display after the end of the big hit game, in addition to lighting the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37, The right-handed display 080IW007 may be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 to execute the right-handed notification. Alternatively, in this case, for example, during the ending period at the end of the jackpot game, the right-handed display 080IW007 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 in addition to the lighting of the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37. May be configured to execute right-handed notification.

Further, in this example, the right-handed display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, in addition to the relatively large size right-handed display 080IW007 as shown in FIG. 9-40 (1), the image display device 5 displays a symbol display (for example, a right-pointing triangular display) indicating right-handedness. May be configured to enable right-handed notification.

Further, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol, a right-handed notification is given during the small hit game (see FIG. 9-40 (2)), and the variation display of the first special symbol is performed. In the case where a small hit occurs, the right-handed notification is not performed during the small hit game (see FIG. 9-40 (3)), but when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol. May be configured so that right-handed notification may not be performed. For example, if a small hit occurs when the second special symbol variation display is executed in a situation where a left-handed operation should be performed in a normal state, the right-handed notification is not performed during the small hit game. You may.

Further, according to the present feature unit 080IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. Is. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). Further, it is possible to control a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable change state) and a specific state (for example, a probable change state) that is more likely to be controlled in an advantageous state than the non-specific state. In addition, the judgment values include a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a variable display display result, and a special display result as a variable display display result. Is included as a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Further, it is possible to set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") in which the number of specific determination values is different. Further, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value, and is common when controlled to the non-specific state and when controlled to the specific state (FIGS. 9-1 and 9). See -2). Therefore, appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, if the lottery probability other than the jackpot winning probability and the type distribution change depending on the set value, the difference in the degree of advantage (difference in ball ejection performance) becomes too remarkable depending on the set value, and the gambling may become excessively high. There is. Therefore, in this feature unit 080IW, by making the number of special judgment values common regardless of the set value (the small hit winning probability is common), it is possible to prevent the difference in the degree of advantage from becoming excessively large depending on the set value. However, it prevents the gambling from becoming excessively high.

Further, according to the feature unit 080IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). Can be executed in parallel). Further, it is possible to control the display result of the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the frequency of becoming a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is increased. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability in a game machine that can be controlled to a special state.

Further, according to the present feature unit 080IW, as special states, there are a first special state (for example, a first KT state) and a second special state (for example, a second KT state) having a higher advantage than the first special state. It is controllable. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability in the game machine that can be controlled to the second special state.

Further, according to the feature unit 080IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, a normal jackpot, a first probability variation jackpot, a second probability variation jackpot, and a third probability variation jackpot). In addition, the type of advantageous state is determined by using the advantageous type determination value (for example, the jackpot type determination value) for determining the type of advantageous state. Further, the number of advantageous type determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIG. 9-3). Therefore, more appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, in this feature unit 080IW, the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (the distribution of the jackpot type is common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage is excessively large depending on the set value. It prevents it from becoming excessively high in gambling.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the case where the jackpot type allocation is the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set is shown. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, the determination ratio of the jackpot type may be different depending on which of the set values "1" to "6", and the advantage may be different depending on the set value.

Further, according to the present feature unit 080IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. Is. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). Further, the judgment values include a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a variable display display result, and a special display result as a variable display display result. It is decided that the special judgment value (for example, the judgment value for small hit judgment) for deciding to derive and display the variable display and the predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result as the display result of the variable display. A predetermined determination value (for example, a determination value for determination of loss) is included. Further, it is possible to set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") in which the number of specific determination values is different. Further, the number of special determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values, and the number of the predetermined determination values differs depending on the set values (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of guessing the set value and improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the feature unit 080IW, it is possible to control a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable change state) and a specific state (for example, a probable change state) which is more likely to be controlled to be more advantageous than the non-specific state. Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination value corresponding to the specific state of all the set values (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value in the specific state.

Further, according to the feature unit 080IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). It can be executed in parallel with the variable display). Further, the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is larger than the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and the second identification information in the specific state can be displayed in a variable manner. The corresponding determination value includes a predetermined determination value (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value using the display result of the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state.

Further, according to the feature unit 080IW, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). Further, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state) which is advantageous for the player. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). In addition, the judgment values include a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a variable display display result, and a special display result as a variable display display result. Is included as a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Further, it is possible to set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") in which the number of specific determination values is different. Further, among the judgment values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information, the number of special judgment values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIG. 9-2), and the judgment corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information. The number of special judgment values differs between the value and the judgment value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the game while realizing appropriate game playability.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above and below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and the disadvantage setting value (for example, 1 to 3) and the game more than the disadvantage setting value. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of setting any setting value from a plurality of setting values including an advantageous setting value (for example, 4 to 6) having a high advantage for the person. When the game state is switched between the game state control means that can control a plurality of game states (for example, the portion that executes steps 080IWS2205 to S2207, S210 to S2219, S2222 to S2225, and S2227 in the game control microcomputer 100) (for example, , When an irregular jackpot occurs, when performing a variation display of the 50th variation in a low probability / high base state), specific images (eg, FIGS. 9-43 (B) and 9-44 (A)). It is possible to perform a special effect (for example, a shutter effect) that temporarily makes a predetermined display (for example, a decorative pattern on the left, middle, and right) difficult to see by displaying a still image in a state where the upper and lower shutters 080IW033,034 shown in the above are closed. Special effect executing means (for example, a portion that executes steps 080IWS503, S505, S506, S508, S512 in the effect control CPU 120), and the special effect executing means includes a plurality of types of specific images (for example, a diagram). (Still images shown in 9-46 (A) to (C)) can be displayed, and different types of specific images are displayed according to the gaming state when controlled to an advantageous state (for example, low probability / high base). When the shutter effect is executed in the variation display of the 50th variation of the state, the upper and lower shutters 080IW033,034 including the characters "END" are displayed as shown in FIG. 9-46 (A), and the gaming state is displayed. When an irregular jackpot occurs in the low probability / low base state (normal state) or in the low probability / high base state, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (B), "waiting for intense heat". When the upper and lower shutters 080IW033,034 including the characters "" are displayed and an irregular jackpot occurs when the gaming state is a high probability / low base state (second KT state), FIG. 9-46 (C). (The upper and lower shutters 080IW033,034 including numbers are displayed as shown in), and as a special effect, after performing a pseudo-closed effect of displaying a specific image and making the predetermined display difficult to see, the specific image is separated. Opening effect that makes the predetermined display visible (eg For example, a moving image in which the upper and lower shutters 080IW033,034 shown in FIGS. 9-43 (C) to (F) and 9-44 (B) and (C) are gradually opened) is executed, and further, an advantageous state is executed. (For example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 12) and a suggestion effect suggesting that the CPU 103 is controlled in an advantageous state based on the determination result of the determination means. (For example, the reach effect) can be executed in a mode including a specific effect (for example, a cut-in effect of the pattern CI-3) and a mode not including the specific effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 shows FIG. 13-18. The part that executes the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 7 after executing the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIG. 7) and the special notification effect (a part that notifies that the effect is different from the specific effect and is controlled to an advantageous state). For example, after the special notification effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) can execute the cut-in effect of the pattern CI-4 (for example, the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIGS. 13-18), the variable display shown in FIG. The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state of a big hit A or a big hit B) and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. (For example, a jackpot gaming state of jackpot C), and when the suggestion effect executing means is set to a disadvantageous set value and it is not determined by the determining means to be controlled to an advantageous state, a specific effect is performed. The suggestion effect of the including aspect cannot be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-21 (B), the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3 and the variable display result. If is out of the question, the cut-in effect is set to the advantageous setting value (the part that cannot be executed in the pattern CI-3), and it is specified when it is not determined by the determining means to be controlled to the advantageous state. Suggestion effects of aspects including effects can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 (C) to 13-21 (E), the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are 4 to 6 If any of the above and the variable display result is out of order, the cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3), and if the special notification effect is executed and controlled to an advantageous state, the second When controlled to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 and 13-22, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-4, the variable display result is always a big hit. When the suggestion effect of the mode including the specific effect is executed and controlled to the advantageous state, it is controlled to the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state (for example, the part controlled by the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot C). As shown in FIGS. 13-21 and 13-22, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3, when the variable display result is a big hit, one of the big hit A, the big hit B, and the big hit C Part controlled by the jackpot game state) A game machine can be mentioned.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to smoothly hide a predetermined display and switch the display with a simple display in a special effect. In addition, the player can be focused on whether or not the special notification effect is executed, and the suggestion effect including the specific effect may be executed and controlled to the second advantageous state, so that the advantageous setting value is set. If it is set, it is possible to reduce the deterioration of the game interest when the suggestion effect including the specific effect is executed and is not controlled to the advantageous state.

In addition to the suggestion effect of the mode including the specific effect, the set value may be suggested according to the mode of the effect in the special effect that temporarily makes the predetermined display difficult to see when the game state is switched. For example, a plurality of types of special effects are prepared (for example, three types of patterns A, B, and C are prepared as the effect patterns of the shutter effect), and the special effects are produced at each timing when the special effects can be executed. By selecting the mode from a plurality of types by lottery or the like and making the selection ratio of each mode of the special effect different depending on the set value, the set value is advantageous to the player. The special effect may be facilitated to be executed in a specific kind of mode (for example, the shutter effect according to the pattern C may be easily executed). By doing so, the variety of modes of the special effect is increased, and when the special effect according to the specific type is executed, the set value is expected to be advantageous to the player. Is improved, so that the game entertainment can be improved.
Further, if the suggestion of the set value is performed by a plurality of elements (for example, two elements of a suggestion effect of a mode including a specific effect and a type of a mode of the special effect), the plurality of elements are advantageous to the player. When a setting value is suggested, the player can be more confident that the setting value is favorable to the player, and even if a certain factor does not suggest a setting value favorable to the player. If an advantageous setting value is suggested by other factors, the player can maintain a sense of expectation that the setting value is advantageous to the player, so that the game interest can be improved. In particular, the suggestion effect of the aspect including the specific effect is not executed when the set value is a disadvantageous set value and it is not determined by the determining means to be controlled in an advantageous state. Even if the effect is not executed and the set value is likely to be an unfavorable set value, the player expects that the set value is advantageous to the player if an advantageous set value is suggested in the special effect. Since the feeling can be maintained, it is possible to reduce the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, it is possible to smoothly hide the predetermined display in the special effect and switch the display with a simple display, and it is possible to reduce the deterioration of the game interest when the suggestion effect including the specific effect is executed and is not controlled to the advantageous state. As an example of the form of the gaming machine, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and a disadvantage setting value (for example, 1 to 3) and an advantage for the player over the disadvantage setting value. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values including a high degree of advantageous setting value (for example, 4 to 6), and is controlled to an advantageous state. A suggestion effect (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 12) and a suggestion effect suggesting that the CPU 103 is controlled to an advantageous state based on the determination result of the determination means. For example, the suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the reach effect) in a mode including or not including a specific effect (for example, a cut-in effect of the pattern CI-3) is shown in FIG. 13-18. A special notification effect (for example, a portion that executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 7 after executing the cut-in effect determination process) and a special notification effect (for example,) that notifies that the effect is different from the specific effect and is controlled to an advantageous state. , The special notification effect executing means capable of executing the pattern CI-4 cut-in effect (for example, the variable display during effect shown in FIG. 7 after the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIGS. 13-18. The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state of a big hit A or a big hit B) and a second advantageous state (for example, a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state). For example, the jackpot gaming state of jackpot C) is included, and the suggestion effect executing means is set to a disadvantageous set value, and when it is not determined to be controlled to an advantageous state by the determining means, the specific effect is included. The suggestion effect of the aspect cannot be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-21 (B), the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, and the variable display result is If it is out of the range, the cut-in effect is set to an advantageous setting value (a part that cannot be executed in the pattern CI-3), and when it is not determined by the determining means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the above-mentioned specification The suggestion effect of the aspect including the effect can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 (C) to 13-21 (E), the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be used. If the set value is any of 4 to 6 and the variable display result is out of alignment, the cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3), and the special notification effect is executed, which is advantageous. When controlled to the state, it is controlled to the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 and 13-22, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-4, it is always variable. When the display result becomes a big hit and is controlled to the big hit gaming state of the big hit C), and the suggestion effect of the mode including the specific effect is executed and controlled to the advantageous state, it is controlled to the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 and 13-22, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3, when the variable display result becomes a big hit, the big hit A, the big hit B, and the big hit are performed. A gaming machine (a part controlled by any of the jackpot gaming states of C) can be mentioned. Hereinafter, an example of a form example of these game machines will be described as another form example.

(Basic explanation which is a premise of the feature part 208SG of this embodiment)
First, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12, among the basic configurations and controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1, which is a premise of the feature unit 208SG described later, the points different from those of FIGS. 2, 4, and 5 described above will be described. To do. Except for these differences, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is the premise of the feature unit 208SG is the same as the configuration and control of the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1 described with reference to FIGS. Is similar to.

FIG. 10 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards mounted on the pachinko gaming machine, and instead of connecting the frame LED 9 to the effect control board 12 via the LED control board 14, lamp control is performed. The main difference from FIG. 2 is that the game effect lamp 909 is connected via the substrate 9014. Further, the game effect lamp 909 is provided at a position where the frame LED 9 is provided in the peripheral portion of the game area in FIG. 1, and the game effect lamp 909 is configured to include the LED.

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 9014, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 909. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp on / off mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 9014. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The lamp control board 9014 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 909, drives the game effect lamp 909 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 909 in a mode specified by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 9014, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process similar to FIG. 3 described above receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S9021). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S9022). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S9023).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S9024). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S9025). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, see See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S9026). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S9027). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S9027, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S9025 shown in FIG. 11 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S90101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead determination is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S9027 shown in FIG. 11, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S90101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S901 to S90120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S90110 to S90120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S90110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when it is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or an outlier symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S90111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S90112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S90113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Includes processing to make settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S90114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for keeping the big winning opening in the open state and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S90115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this process during opening of the big hit, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the large winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like are used as the basis for the large winning opening. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. Ends processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S90116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S90117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S90118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S90119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S90120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Explanation of feature section 208SG)
Next, the game machine in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-1 to 13-39.

First, FIG. 13-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 13-1 and 13-3, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into an outer frame 208SG001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board (gauge) constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 208SG003 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 208SG003, between the door opening position where the glass door frame 208SG003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 208SG003 with the left side as the center and the door closing position which closes the front surface. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 208SG003a, and when the glass door frame 208SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In addition, the game machine frame 208SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a game machine clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and players other than the clerk can open the game machine frame 208SG003 and glass. The door frame 208SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 208SG002L is a game area in which the (left-handed) game ball launched relatively weakly by the operation of the hitting operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 208SG002R is the left game area 208SG002L by the operation of the ball hitting operation handle 30. This is a game area in which a (right-handed) game ball launched more strongly than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 208SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

Further, a general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 208SG002L, and in the right game area 208SG002R, a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general winning ball device 6B are arranged from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 208SG002R. A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 208SG002L can win a prize in the first starting winning hole formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 208SG002R is variable. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10, and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is possible to pass through the passing gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 13-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 208SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 208SG002L cannot win the second start winning opening or the large winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 208SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 13-2 and 13-3, the main substrate 11 in the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment is housed in the substrate case 208SG201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the state. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 208SG051 for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the set value change state, and the like are used. A setting changeover switch 208SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value, and an open sensor 208SG090 that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 208SG003 are provided. The set value change state in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment is also a state in which a clerk of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state).

The setting switching main body unit provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the lock switch 208SG051 and the setting changeover switch 208SG052 is housed in the board case 208SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 208SG051 and the setting changeover switch 208SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the substrate case 208SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 208SG201.

Since the board case 208SG201 having the lock switch 208SG051 and the setting changeover switch 208SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the gaming machine frame 208SG003 in the closed state, and a predetermined door key is pressed. It can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame 208SG003. Further, since the lock switch 208SG051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch 208SG051. Further, the lock switch 208SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later by using a setting key. In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys is illustrated, but these may be shared by one key.

Further, in the substrate case 208SG201, a display monitor 208SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later is arranged. The display monitor 208SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case 208SG201. That is, the display monitor 208SG029 is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case 208SG201 when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 208SG003 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 208SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 208SG, if the lock switch 208SG051 and the release sensor 208SG09 are turned on when the power is turned on, the set value is changed and the set value is displayed on the display monitor 208SG029. Is displayed. At this time, by operating the setting changeover switch 208SG052, the numerical value (set value) displayed on the display monitor 208SG029 can be updated and displayed.

Then, by turning off the lock switch 208SG051 while any numerical value from 1 to 6 is displayed on the display monitor 208SG029, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 208SG029 is set as a new set value. To. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the CPU 103 sends a setting value designation command, which will be described later, to the effect control board 12 regardless of whether or not a new setting value is set (set). By doing so, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the set value designation command.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-1 and 13-2, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a predetermined position (for example, a lower left position of the gaming area) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment. 1 First special symbol display device 208SG004A capable of variable display of 1 special figure, 2nd special symbol display device 208SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special figure, 1st hold display capable of displaying 1st hold storage number Device 208SG025A, 2nd hold indicator 208SG025B capable of displaying the 2nd hold storage number, normal symbol display 208SG020 capable of executing variable display of the normal symbol, normal figure hold indicator 208SG025C capable of displaying the normal symbol hold storage number, In the game state where the round display 208SG131 that can display the number of rounds (big hit type) of the big hit game during the big hit game, the game ball such as the high base state (time saving state) or the big hit game state is launched toward the right game area 208SG002R. A game information display unit 208SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 208SG 132 that lights up, a probability variation lamp 208SG 133 that lights up in the probability variation state, and a time reduction lamp 208SG 134 that lights up in the high base state (time reduction state) are collectively arranged.

The first special symbol display device 208SG004A and the second special symbol display device 208SG004B are each composed of 8-segment LEDs. Further, in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A and the second special symbol display device 208SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is out of place or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

In the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 208SG004A has a variable display result with two types of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. Derived display is possible. Further, in the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 208SG004B is variablely displayed by two kinds of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. The results can be derived and displayed.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 208SG004A and the second special symbol display device 208SG004B are all different, but the first special symbol display device 208SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed in the above and the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 208SG004B may overlap.

In the first hold indicator 208SG025A and the second hold indicator 208SG025B, LEDs of four segments are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. In these first hold indicator 208SG025A and second hold indicator 208SG025B, if the number of hold storage is one, only the LED at the left end lights up, and each time the number of hold storage increases, it is the second from the left. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the LED on the hold display corresponding to the variable display is set in a predetermined shift direction (feature of the present embodiment) according to the decrease (consumption) of the hold memory. In part 208SG, the lights are turned off toward the left).

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure holding memory and the second special figure holding storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure holding storage is preferentially executed. It has become like. Therefore, for example, when there is one first special figure hold memory and two second special figure hold memories (only the LED at the left end of the first hold indicator 208SG025A is lit and the second hold is held. (When the two LEDs on the left of the display 208SG25B are lit), the first special figure hold is held after the second special figure hold memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure hold memory. Variable display based on memory is executed.

Further, the round display 208SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). As the jackpot types in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A which is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B which is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C which is a 15-round jackpot. Therefore, which segment of the segments constituting the round display 208SG131 is lit differs depending on the jackpot type.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 909. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED are included.

The effect control board 12 in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 208SG321 and a second movable body 208SG322 that can operate between the origin position and the effect position during variable display and the like. The origin detection sensor 208SG331 that can detect that the 1 movable body 208SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 208SG321 and the second movable body 208SG322 are located at the origin position of the second movable body 208SG322. The origin detection sensor 208SG332 capable of detecting this is connected to the origin detection sensor 208SG332.

FIG. 13-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 208SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 13-4 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 13-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 208SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 13-4 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 13-4 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by the error notification process described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 208SG004B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number in order to display the special figure reserved storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (commands for designating a winning determination result) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" and the judgment result of the big hit type (probability change, non-probability change, or sudden change) as the winning judgment result. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category indicating a determination result of whether the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is the variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" as the determination result at the time of winning. It is a command.

The command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating the newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes the game control program to perform the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

FIG. 13-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 13-5, in the feature unit 208SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3 for determination, the random value MR4 for determining the display result of the general map, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In the present embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 13-5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each random value is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 13-6 shows the fluctuation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit". Further, 1 variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a “small hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach in which a super reach effect such as super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, and super reach δ is executed. There is a fluctuation pattern. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, the super reach variation pattern may be provided with 5 or more super reach variation patterns.

As shown in FIG. 13-6, with respect to the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the super reach fluctuation patterns, super reach α and super reach β, are shown. , Super reach γ, and super reach δ are set shorter. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach production of the super reach such as super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, and super reach δ in the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment is executed, the super reach The special figure fluctuation pattern is set longer in the order of δ, super reach γ, super reach β, and super reach α.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set to be "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach. Therefore, since the big hit expectation is set to be high, the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

However, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as a fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ, the variable display result is notified that the variable display result is a big hit after once notifying that the variable display result is out of order as the reach effect of the super reach γ. A variation pattern (PB1-5 shown in FIG. 13-6) for executing the revival effect is provided. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ that executes the revival effect is set to have a longer special figure fluctuation time than the normal fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ and a shorter special figure fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ. However, it is an exceptionally high fluctuation pattern (100%) with the highest expectation of big hits.

In the feature section 208SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into, for example, non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, and the like. Rather than determining the variation patterns to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation patterns belonging to the determined type after determining them first, only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern type is provided to determine these fluctuations. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value for determining the pattern type, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-6, the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the fluctuation content (effect content) is predetermined for each fluctuation pattern, but the present invention illustrates this. The variation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value, even if the variation pattern is the same. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 out of normal reach, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. As a fluctuation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach out of reach, when the set value is 3, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three times to make a fluctuation pattern that is out of super reach.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as the work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 13-7 to 13-14, which are prepared by the CPU 103 for performing various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 includes table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIGS. 13-7 and 13-8, and the second special figure display result determination shown in FIGS. 13-9 and 13-10. Table, jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 13-11 (A), jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 13-11 (B), and jackpot fluctuation pattern determination A table, a small hit variation pattern determination table, an outlier variation pattern determination table, a general map display result determination table (not shown), a general map variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. In other words, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the amusement park side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the amusement park side. Become.

13-7 to 13-10 are explanatory views showing a display result determination table. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as the display result determination table, individual display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , The display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

In FIG. 13-7 (A), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 1, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1237 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 13-7 (B) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 1, and the gaming state is the probability variation state (high accuracy and high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 13-7 (C), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 2, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1253 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 13-7 (D) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 2, and the gaming state is the probability variation state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020-1383 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 13-7 (E), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 3, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020-1272 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 13-7 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 3, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1429 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 13-8 (A), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1292 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 13-8 (B) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1487 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33049 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 13-8 (C), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 5, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020-1317 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 13-8 (D) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 5, and the gaming state is the probability variation state (high accuracy and high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020-1556 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 13-8 (E), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 6, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 13-8 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 6, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1674 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 13-9 (A), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 1, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the second special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1237 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

FIG. 13-9 (B) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 1, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the second special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 13-9 (C), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 2, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1253 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

FIG. 13-9 (D) is a second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 2, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020-1383 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

In FIG. 13-9 (E), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 3, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for the second special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020-1272 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

FIG. 13-9 (F) is a second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 3, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the second special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1429 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 13-10 (A), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the second special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1292 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

FIG. 13-10 (B) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the second special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1487 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

In FIG. 13-10 (C), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 5, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the second special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1317 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 13-10 (D) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 5, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020-1556 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 13-10 (E), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 6, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the second special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 13-10 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 6, and the gaming state is the probability variation state (high accuracy and high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1674 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

As described above, in each display result judgment table, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values than in the normal state or the time saving state are the special figures of "big hit". It is assigned to the display result. As a result, in the probabilistic state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 performs probabilistic change control, the probability that it is determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" in the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (the present embodiment). In the feature unit 208SG of, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and 1/240 when the set value is 4. Compared to 1/220 when the set value is 5 and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the probability that the special figure display result will be controlled as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state is higher (this). In the feature unit 208SG of the embodiment, when the set value is 1, 1/200, when the set value is 2, 1/180, when the set value is 3, 1/160, and when the set value is 4, 1 / 140, 1/120 when the set value is 5, 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state, the probability of being determined to control the jackpot gaming state is higher than in the normal state or the time saving state. , The determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13-7 to 13-10, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is different according to each set value. Different (for example, if the set value is 1, the probability variation of the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability variation with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times. The jackpot probability multiplier in the state is about 1.56 times, and if the set value is 3, the jackpot probability multiplier in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state at each set value is constant (for example, 5 times). ) May be set.

Further, in each of the first special figure display result determination tables, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 13-7 and 13-8, in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the small hit game state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is determined regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the display result judgment table for figures. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 13-9 and 13-10, in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the small hit game state is set to 1/100.

It should be noted that the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is the same regardless of the set value. The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be different depending on the set value. Further, the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" and the small hit gaming state is different according to the variable special map. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state may be the same probability regardless of the variable special figure.

Here, paying attention to the numerical range of the hit judgment values assigned to the "big hit" and the "small hit" in each display result judgment table, the display result for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the determination table, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is in the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is in the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1020 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while the small The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6, and 32767 is set as the reference value of the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value) of 32767 to 33094. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of the hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, when the set value is 1, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the big hit judgment values are not included in the common numerical range. Numerical values within the range including the common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421, with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set based on the hit determination value 1020. The judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the continuous numerical range of 1 is based on the hit judgment value 32767 regardless of the game state and the set value (common). The variable display result is judged by using the judgment value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit judgment value.

Further, in each of these display result judgment tables, when the fluctuation special figures are the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is Same). In addition, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result judgment table for the first special figure). While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special figure is about 655. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value).

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, there is a probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as the "big hit". Judgment values are assigned so that the lower the value of the set value and the larger the value of the set value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined to be controlled to the big hit gaming state as "big hit" (big hit probability: set value 6> set value). 5> Set value 4> Set value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is decided to be A to jackpot C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 13-7 to 13-10 indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A or the second special symbol display device 208SG004B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 208SG004A or the second special symbol display device 208SG004B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, a total of 6 set values of 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

13-11 (A) and 13-11 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 13-11 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, FIG. 13-11 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is variably displayed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-12. In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, the jackpot A (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state and the game shifts to the low probability high base state, and the jackpot game After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and the jackpot B and the jackpot C (also referred to as the probability variation jackpot) for shifting to the high-accuracy high-base state are set.

The jackpot game state by "big hit A" is a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot game state by "B" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Figure Ends when the game is in a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot B or the jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is the big hit B or the big hit C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so that the big hit game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs in.

In the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which three types of jackpots A to C are provided as jackpot types is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is 2. There may be less than one type, or four or more types.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is assigned to the jackpot A. 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is assigned to jackpot A. 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. That is, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the winning opening in which the game ball has won is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. , The jackpot type is determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is not limited to this. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is predetermined to set the variable display result to "big hit" and the variable display result to be "small hit". The jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is determined in advance and the deviation pattern judgment table used when it is decided in advance that the variable display result is "off" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3), and the revival effect are executed. Not Super Reach γ Jackpot Fluctuation Pattern (PB1-4), Super Reach γ Jackpot Fluctuation Pattern (PB1-5), Super Reach δ Jackpot Fluctuation Pattern (PB1-6) On the other hand, a predetermined random value within the range that the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (A), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, 1 to 50 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are normal reach jackpot fluctuation patterns (PB1). -1) is assigned, 51 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 201 to 400 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). It is assigned, and 401 to 650 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot (PB1-4) that does not execute the resurrection effect, and 651 to 700 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the resurrection effect. It is assigned to (PB1-5), and 701 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-6) of the super reach δ jackpot.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the fluctuation pattern for big hits is determined by using the fluctuation pattern determination table of 1, that is, the pachinko. Although the embodiment in which the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern is the same when the variable display result is a big hit regardless of the set value set in the game machine 1 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. , The determination ratio of each fluctuation pattern may be different for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (B), in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, the variation pattern of small hits from 0 to 997 in the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 ( It is assigned to PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern of the small hit is 2 or more. Fluctuation pattern may be provided.

Further, the deviation pattern determination table includes the deviation pattern determination table A used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control, and the low base. The deviation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and the deviation variation used when the total number of reserved storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for deviation used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed are prepared in advance.

In the deviation pattern determination table A, the non-reach deviation variation pattern without shortening (PA1-1), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super Random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is taken for the fluctuation pattern of reach β off (PA2-3), the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ off (PA2-4), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach δ off (PA2-5). A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value in the possible range.

As shown in FIG. 13-14 (A), in the deviation pattern determination table A (for low-base medium total hold storage number of 1 or less), 1 to 450 out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997. Are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are out of super reach α. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 851 to 930 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β, and 931 to 970 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2) out of super reach γ. -4) is assigned, and 971 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-5) out of super reach δ.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super are corresponding to the total number of reserved storages of 2 to 4. Reach α out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), Super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) Super reach γ out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-4), Super reach δ out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-5) On the other hand, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIG. 13-14 (B), in the deviation pattern determination table B (for 2 to 4 low-base medium total pending storage numbers), 1 to 1 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997. Up to 500 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are out of super reach α. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), 851 to 930 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β, and 913 to 970 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach γ. It is assigned to PA2-4), and 971 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-5) out of super reach δ.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super Fluctuation pattern of reach α off (PA2-2), fluctuation pattern of super reach β off (PA2-3), fluctuation pattern of super reach γ off (PA2-4), fluctuation pattern of super reach δ off (PS2-5) On the other hand, a predetermined random value within the range that the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIG. 13-14 (C), in the deviation pattern determination table C (for low-base medium total hold storage number of 5 or more), 1 to 550 out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997. Are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are out of super reach α. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 851 to 930 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β, and 931 to 970 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2) out of super reach γ. -4) is assigned, and 971 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-5) out of super reach δ.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α deviation variation pattern corresponding to the time reduction control are performed. (PA2-2), fluctuation pattern of super reach β out of alignment (PA2-3), fluctuation pattern of super reach γ out of alignment (PA2-4), fluctuation pattern of super reach δ out of alignment (PA2-5) A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in the range that the MR3 can take.

As shown in FIG. 13-14 (D), in the deviation pattern determination table D (for high base and medium), 1 to 550 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are non-reach deviation variations. It is assigned to the pattern (PA1-4), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2). 851 to 930 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β out of order (PA2-3), and 931 to 970 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of out of super reach γ (PA2-4). Therefore, 971 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-5) out of the super reach δ.

As described above, when the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio for determining the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern is set higher than the ratio for determining the super reach variation pattern. When the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, 701 to 850 of the determination values are the fluctuation patterns of the super reach α deviation, and 851 to 930 are the deviation patterns of the super reach β, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. Fluctuation patterns, 931 to 970 are assigned to the fluctuation patterns of the super reach γ, and 971 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation patterns of the super reach δ, that is, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the super reach Since the fluctuation pattern is determined by a common determination ratio, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered due to the variable display according to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach not being executed.

In the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment, as the deviation pattern, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α deviation, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β deviation, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ deviation, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ deviation Although the respective determination ratios exemplify the completely same form between the set values, the present invention is not limited to this, and these fluctuation patterns of the super reach α deviation and the fluctuation of the super reach β deviation are illustrated. The determination ratios of the pattern, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ deviation, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ deviation may be different for each set value.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the embodiment in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. If the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination ratios of all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same, and the fluctuation of either non-reach and normal reach may be the same. Only the pattern determination rate may be the same.

The non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) has a shorter variation time than the non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 13-6). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By winning a start prize while the player is in the game, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize to be stored, and when the number of stored memories decreases, the fluctuation time is long and the non-reach is out of reach. By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display time becomes longer, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being less interesting due to the variable display not being executed.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13-14 (A) to 13-14 (C), variations are made using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the total number of reserved storages. Although the form of determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first The variation pattern may be determined using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the number of reserved memory of the special symbol and the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which there is a one-to-one correspondence between whether or not to execute the reach effect and which reach effect is to be executed for each determined fluctuation pattern. The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach effect based on the special figure variation time of the variation pattern, the variable display result, etc., and which reach effect is executed. You may decide whether to do it by lottery.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 13-1 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). To. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure holding storage unit, a second special drawing holding storage unit, a normal drawing holding storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter. It has a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

The first special figure reservation storage unit is a special figure in which the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but has not yet been started. The reserved data of the game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and satisfies the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc. extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on , Store until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and a starting winning (second starting winning) occurs, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 208SG004B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and satisfies the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on , Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 208SG020 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map holding storage unit is associated with the hold numbers in the order in which the game balls pass through the passage gate 41, and is for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 of the above is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can update the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and periodically according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated targetly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Further, the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit.

In the effect control flag setting unit, there are a plurality of types that can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In addition, the data constituting the start winning command buffer is stored in the predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit. The command buffer received at the time of starting winning corresponds to the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage. A storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special figure during variable display is provided. Further, in the start winning command buffer, the storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage is stored. (Area corresponding to) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display are provided. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command) or the hold memory number notification command ( Commands such as the first hold storage number notification command or the second hold storage number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the 1st special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the 2nd special figure hold storage in the received command buffer at the time of starting winning associate these commands, and the 1st special figure hold storage and the 2nd special figure hold storage. Figure A storage area (entry) for storing separately from the reserved storage is secured.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. It is shifted up one by one so that it does.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the received command buffer at the time of starting winning. At the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the received command buffer at the time of starting winning. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, each command is stored in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. I will go.

Next, the process executed by the CPU 103 in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment will be described. 13-15 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. In the start winning determination process, as shown in FIG. 13-15, the CPU 103 first receives a detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is on (208SGS501a). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (208SGS501a; Y), the number of reserved special figures reserved for the special figure game using the first special figure is the predetermined upper limit value (the number of reserved stored figures of the first special figure). For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is "4") (208SGS502). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit. When the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is not the upper limit value (208SGS502; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit is set to "1" (208SGS503).

When the first start port switch 22A is off at 208SGS501a (208SGS501a; N), or when the first special figure hold storage number reaches the upper limit value at 208SGS502 (208SGS502; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B It is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is ON based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the player (208SGS501b). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (208SGS501b; Y), the second special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (. For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is "4") (208SGS505). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit. When the second special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in 208SGS505 (208SGS505; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit is set to "2" (208SGS506).

When the second start port switch is not on (208SGS501b; N) or when the second special figure reserved storage number is the upper limit value (208SGS505; Y), the start winning determination process ends.

After executing any of the processes of 208SGS503 and 208SGS506, the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (208SGS507). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. The second hold memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (208SGS508). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit, may be updated so as to be added by 1.

After executing the process of 208SGS508, the CPU 103 uses the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is extracted (208SGS509). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (208SGS510). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the first 2 Numerical data indicating random values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the special figure hold storage unit.

The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of 208SGS509, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for determining the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the variable display mode including the variable display time.

Following the processing of the 208SGS510, the transmission setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (208SGS 511). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first start opening prize designation command to 12 is made. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is used. Make settings to send the second start port winning designation command. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 11 after the special symbol process process is completed. Will be done.

Following the process of 208SGS511, the random number value determination process at the time of winning is executed (208SGS512). After that, for example, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. (208SGS513). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 11 after the special symbol process process is completed. Will be done.

After executing the process of 208SGS513, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (208SGS514). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (208SGS514; Y), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (208SGS515), and then the process proceeds to 208SGS501b. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (208SGS514; N), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (208SGS516), and then the start winning determination process is performed. To finish. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 13-16 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed by 208SGS512 of FIG. 13-15 as the winning random number value determination process. When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started in the feature unit 208SG, in the special symbol normal processing (step S22 of FIG. 12), the game state, the special symbol for executing the variable display, and the display according to the set value are displayed. Select the result judgment table (see FIGS. 13-7 to 13-10), and use the selected display result judgment table to set the special figure display result (variable display result of the special symbol) as a "big hit" and make a big hit game state. It is determined whether or not to control the game and whether or not to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" in the small hit game state.

On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination processing of 208SGS512 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). Therefore, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. Do. As a result, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, at the start of the variable display. It is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the variable display mode of which category, and based on this judgment result. Then, as will be described later, the effect control CPU 120 or the like executes the pre-reading advance notice effect such as the hold display advance notice effect.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 13-16 (A), the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit 208SG152, and the pachinko game. The current gaming state of the machine 1 is specified (208SGS521). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probability change state (high probability high base state) when the probability change flag is on, and is in the time saving state (low probability high base state) when the probability change flag is off and the time saving flag is on. When both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are off, it is sufficient to specify that the normal state (low probability low base state).

Following the processing of the 208SGS521, the CPU 103 specifies a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (208SGS522). Next, the display result determination table according to the current game state, the start opening buffer value, and the set value is selected and set (208SGS524).

Specifically, when the start port buffer value is "1", when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is for the first special drawing shown in FIG. 13-7 (A). When the display result judgment table is set and the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the probability change state, the display result judgment table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 13-7 (B) is set and the set value is 2. When the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 13-7 (C) is set, the set value is 2, and the game state is the probability change state. If there is, the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 13-7 (D) is set, and if the set value is 3 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, FIG. 13-7 (E). ) Is set, and when the set value is 3 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the display result judgment table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 13-7 (F) is set. To set.

Further, when the start port buffer value is "1", the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the first special figure display result determination shown in FIG. 13-8 (A) is determined. When the table is set and the set value is 4 and the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 13-8 (B) is set, and the set value is 5 and When the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 13-8 (C) is set, and when the set value is 5 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state. When the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 13-8 (D) is set and the set value is 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is shown in FIG. 13-8 (E). The display result determination table for the first special figure is set, and when the set value is 6 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 13-8 (F) is set. ..

Further, when the start port buffer value is "2", when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination for the second special figure shown in FIG. 13-9 (A) is determined. When the table is set and the set value is 1 and the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 13-9 (B) is set, and the set value is 2 and When the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 13-9 (C) is set, and when the set value is 2 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state. When the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 13-9 (D) is set and the set value is 3 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is shown in FIG. 13-9 (E). The display result determination table for the second special figure is set, and when the set value is 3 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 13-9 (F) is set. ..

Further, when the start port buffer value is "2", the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination for the second special figure shown in FIG. 13-10 (A) is determined. When the table is set and the set value is 4 and the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 13-10 (B) is set, and the set value is 5 and When the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 13-10 (C) is set, and when the set value is 5 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state. When the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 13-10 (D) is set and the set value is 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is shown in FIG. 13-10 (E). The display result determination table for the second special figure is set, and when the set value is 6 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 13-10 (F) is set. ..

After setting the display result determination table, the variable display result determination module (208SGS525) performs a process of determining whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit", or "missing". In the variable display result judgment module, the numerical range of the big hit judgment value or the small hit judgment value in the set variable display result judgment table is compared with the value of the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, and the disorder is described. If the value of the numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, the variable display result is judged as a big hit, and if the value of the random value MR1 is within the numerical range of the small hit judgment value, the variable display result is judged as a small hit. Then, if the value of the random number value MR1 is outside the numerical range of the big hit determination value and outside the numerical range of the small hit determination value, the variable display result may be determined to be out of range.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the 208SGS525 determines that the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS526). When it is determined that the hit is not a big hit (208SGS526; N), it is determined whether or not the variable display result is determined to be a small hit in the 208SGS525 (208SGS527). When it is determined that the small hit does not occur, that is, when it is determined that the variable display is out of alignment (208SGS527; N), the first symbol designation is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "out of alignment". The command transmission setting is executed (208SGS527a), and it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (208SGS528).

When the time saving flag is not set (208SGS528; N), the deviation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 13-14 is selected and set, and the process proceeds to 208SGS536 (208SGS529). When the time saving flag is set. (208SGS528; Y) selects and sets the deviation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 13-14 (D), and proceeds to 208SGS536 (208SGS530).

When it is determined by the 208SGS526 that the variable display is a big hit (208SGS526; Y), the big hit type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type and the big hit type determination table (208SGS533). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that composes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

Further, a symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, a second symbol designation command when the jackpot is A, a third symbol designation command when the jackpot is B, and a fourth symbol when the jackpot is C. The transmission setting of the symbol designation command is executed (208SGS534), and then the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13-13 (A) is selected and set as a table for determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern (208SGS535). ), Proceed to 208SGS536.

Further, when the 208SGS527 determines that a small hit is obtained in the variable display (208SGS527; Y), the transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being a "small hit". Is executed (208SGS531), the variation pattern determination table for small hits shown in FIG. 13-13 (B) is selected and set (208SGS532), and the process proceeds to 208SGS536.

In the feature unit 208SG, in the deviation pattern determination table A to the deviation variation pattern determination table D, determination values of 1 to 700 are commonly assigned to the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern. 701 to 997 are assigned a fluctuation pattern of super reach.

Therefore, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the variation pattern is determined using the deviation pattern determination table A or the deviation pattern determination table D, so that the determination of non-reach and super reach is the determination. Even if the number of reserved memories changes later, it will always be a non-reach or super reach fluctuation pattern. Therefore, in the determination at the time of starting winning, the deviation pattern determination table A or the deviation pattern determination table D is used to determine the variation pattern. Is to be judged.

After executing any of the processes of 208SGS529, 208SGS530, 208SGS532,208SGS535, the variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination are used to perform disturbance. The variation category according to the range of determination values including the numerical value MR3 is determined (208SGS536). In this feature unit 208SG, as shown in FIG. 13-16 (B), when at least the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode is "non-reach" in common regardless of the total number of reserved storages. Variable category, variable display mode of "super reach", variable category other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hit), and "other" variable category. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not the variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, after making a setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the processing of 208SGS536 to the effect control board 12 (208SGS537), the random number value determination process at the time of winning is terminated.

The symbol designation command and the variable category designation command are transmitted when the CPU 103 executes a command control process.

Next, the processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 13-17 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) shown in FIG. 7.

In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is set (208SGS271). When the first variable display start command reception flag is set (208SGS271; Y), it corresponds to the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer. The various command data and various flags that are attached and stored are shifted upward by one buffer number (S272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is not set in the 208SGS271 (208SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is set (208SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is not set (208SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display 2 start command reception flag is set (208SGS273; Y). ), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the received command buffer at the time of starting winning are stored for one buffer number. It shifts to the upper side one by one (208SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

After executing the 208SGS272 or 208SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (208SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (208SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. To do.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, when the received display result specification command is the second variable display result specification command corresponding to the jackpot A, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged in an even number as a stop symbol Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Further, when the received display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the jackpot B, for example, as a stop symbol, a decorative symbol in which 3 symbols are arranged in odd numbers other than "7" and "3" Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Then, when the received display result specification command is the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the jackpot C, for example, a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are aligned with "7" or "3" as stop symbols (big hit). Design) is decided. When the received display result specification command is the fifth variable table uncle result specification command indicating a small hit, for example, three consecutive numbers such as "123" and "246", and three consecutive even numbers (or three consecutive even numbers). Determine the combination of decorative symbols (small hit symbol) such as (odd number). Then, when the received display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command indicating loss, for example, a combination of decorative symbols (missing symbols) different from the above-mentioned large hit symbol or small hit symbol is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a stop symbol determination table in which random numbers for determining stop symbols are extracted and data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

After the execution of 208SGS276, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of super reach (208SG277). Whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of super reach may be specified from the variation pattern specification command read out in 208SG275. When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach (208SG277; Y), a cut for determining whether or not to execute the cut-in effect described later during the reach effect and the effect pattern of the cut-in effect. The in-effect determination process (208SGS278) is executed, and the process proceeds to 208SGS279. If the variable display variation pattern is not the super reach variation pattern (208SG277; N), the process proceeds to 208SGS279 without executing the process of 208SGS278.

Then, in the 208SGS279, the effect control CPU 120 executes a advance notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute the advance notice effect described later in the variable display and the effect pattern of the advance notice effect (208SGS279). As shown in FIGS. 13-27 to 13-29, the advance notice effect is an effect that can be executed during the variable display in the non-reach variable pattern, and the variable display starts in the normal reach or super reach variable pattern. It is a production that can be performed during the period from the end to the timing of reaching.

After the execution of 208SGS279, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command (208SGS280). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (208SGS281).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, and the like are arranged in order in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). It executes control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L and 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) (208SGS282). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 9014. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 208SG in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. May select the variation pattern to be used from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern specification command.

Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time (variable display time) specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is set in the fluctuation time timer (208SGS283). Further, a predetermined time is set in the fluctuation control timer (208SGS284). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and each time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image according to the signal to realize variable display of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (208 SGS285).

13-18 to 13-20 are flowcharts showing the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIGS. 13-17. In the cut-in effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern of super reach α or super reach β (208SGS301). When the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach α or super reach β (208SGS301; Y), the cut-in effect determination process is terminated, and when the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach γ or super reach δ (208SGS301; Y). N) further determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach γ (208SGS302).

When the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ (208SGS301; Y), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-5, that is, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ that executes the revival effect (208SGS303). .. When the fluctuation pattern is PB1-5 (208SGS303; Y), the effect control CPU 120 specifies the jackpot type (208SGS304) and determines whether or not the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS305). ..

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS305; Y), whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS306), and 208SGS308. Proceed to. In 208SGS306, as shown in FIG. 13-21 (A), the cut-in effect is not executed based on the fluctuation pattern being PB1-5 and the variable display result (big hit type) being jackpot A or jackpot B. Is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 55%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 5%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

As shown in FIGS. 13-28 and 13-31, the cut-in effect in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment displays the image of the push button 31B on the image display device 5 during the reach effect of the super reach γ. Then, the player is urged to operate the push button 31B. When the push button 31B is operated during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends without the push button 31B being operated, each effect is displayed on the image display device 5. Display effects and cut-in images according to the pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 13-23 and 13-31, if the effect pattern is the pattern CI-1, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 208SG005w together with the blue effect, and the effect pattern is If the pattern CI-2, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 208SG005x together with the red effect, and if the effect pattern is the pattern CI-3, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 208SG005y together with the golden effect. If the effect pattern is pattern CI-4, the cut-in image 208SG005z is displayed together with the rainbow-colored effect on the image display device 5.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS305; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern based on the jackpot type being jackpot C (208SGS307). Proceed to 208SGS308. In 208SGS307, as shown in FIG. 13-21 (A), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is 10% based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern is PB1-5 and the variable display result (big hit type) is big hit C. Determined by the ratio of. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 54%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 5%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 1%.

After the execution of the 208SGS306 or 208SGS307, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the cut-in effect is determined (208SGS308). When the execution of the cut-in effect is decided (208SGS308; Y), the determined effect pattern is stored and a value corresponding to the period until the start of the cut-in effect is set in the cut-in effect start waiting timer (208SGS309, 208SGS310). ), The cut-in effect determination process is completed.

Further, in the case of the 208SGS303, when the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 or PB1-4) of the super reach γ that does not execute the revival effect (208SGS303; N), the effect control CPU 120 is set to the pachinko gaming machine 1. The set value is specified (208 SGS311), and it is determined whether or not the specified set value is any of 1 to 3 (208SGS312). The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be specified based on the set value designation command received from the CPU 103.

When the execution of the cut-in effect is determined in the cut-in effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the cut-in effect start waiting timer by -1 each time the variable display effect process (S172) is executed. When the timer for waiting for the start of the cut-in effect has timed out, the process table for the cut-in effect is set according to the determined effect pattern. After that, each time the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display, the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp) is in accordance with the contents of the data (process data) in the cut-in effect process table. The cut-in effect may be executed by controlling (909, etc.).

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3 (208SGS312; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (308SGS313). Whether or not the variable display result is a big hit may be determined by determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit. When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS313; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS314), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (208SGS315).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS3315; Y), the cut-in effect is executed based on the setting value being any one of 1 to 3 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. (208SGS3316) is determined, and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS316, as shown in FIG. 13-21 (B), the cut-in is based on the fact that the set value is any of 1 to 3 and the variable display result (big hit type) is big hit A or big hit B. The non-execution of the production is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS315; N), the effect control CPU 120 performs a cut-in effect based on the setting value being any one of 1 to 3 and the jackpot type being jackpot C. The presence or absence of execution and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS317), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS317, as shown in FIG. 13-21 (B), the cut-in effect is not produced based on the fact that the set value is any of 1 to 3 and the variable display result (big hit type) is big hit C. The execution is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the variable display result is out of alignment in 208SGS313 (208SGS313; N), the effect control CPU 120 cuts in based on the fact that the set value is one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result is out of alignment. Whether or not to execute the effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS318), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS318, as shown in FIG. 13-21 (B), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is 55% based on the fact that the set value is any of 1 to 3 and the variable display result is out of order. Determined by percentage. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 35%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 0%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 208SGS312 is any of 4 to 6 (208SGS312; N), the effect control CPU 120 has a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of 4. It is determined whether or not (208SGS221). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4 (208SGS321; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS322). Whether or not the variable display result is a big hit may be determined by determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS322; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS323), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (208SGS324).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS324; Y), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern based on the setting value being 4 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. Is determined (208SGS325), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In 208SGS325, as shown in FIG. 13-21 (C), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is performed at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 4 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. decide. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS324; N), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the setting value of 4 and the jackpot type being jackpot C (the jack-in effect is executed). 208SGS326), 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS326, as shown in FIG. 13-21 (C), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 4 and the jackpot type being jackpot C. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the variable display result is out of alignment in 208SGS322 (208SGS322; N), it is further determined whether or not the gaming state is a high-accuracy high-base state (208SGS327). The game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103.

When the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state (208SGS327; Y), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 4, the variable display result is out of order, and the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state. Whether or not to execute the in-effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS328), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS328, as shown in FIG. 13-21 (C), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 4, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the high accuracy and high base state. The non-execution of the in-effect is determined at a rate of 40%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 20%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the gaming state is the low accuracy high base state or the low accuracy low base state (208SGS327; N), the set value is 4, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the low accuracy high base. The presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the state or the low probability low base state (208 SGS 329), and the processes of 208 SGS 308 to 208 SGS 310 are executed. In 208SGS329, as shown in FIG. 13-21 (C), the set value is 4, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the low probability high base state or the low probability low base state. Based on this, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 59%. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 1%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 208SGS321 is not 4 (208SGS321; N), whether or not the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5 in the effect control CPU 120. Is determined (208SGS330). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5 (208SGS330; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS331). Whether or not the variable display result is a big hit may be determined by determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS331; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS332), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (208SGS333).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS333; Y), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern based on the setting value being 5 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. Is determined (208SGS334), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In 208SGS334, as shown in FIG. 13-21 (D), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is performed at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 5 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. decide. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS333; N), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the setting value of 5 and the jackpot type being jackpot C (the jack-in effect is executed). 208SGS335), 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS335, as shown in FIG. 13-21 (D), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 5 and the jackpot type being jackpot C. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

If the variable display result is out of sync with the 208SGS331 (208SGS331; N), it is further determined whether or not the gaming state is a high-accuracy high-base state (208SGS336). The game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103.

When the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state (208SGS336; Y), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 5, the variable display result is out of order, and the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state. Whether or not to execute the in-effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS337), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS337, as shown in FIG. 13-21 (D), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 5, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the high accuracy and high base state. The non-execution of the in-effect is determined at a rate of 35%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 25%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the gaming state is the low accuracy high base state or the low accuracy low base state (208SGS336; N), the set value is 5, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the low accuracy high base. The presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the state or the low probability low base state (208 SGS 338), and the processes of 208 SGS 308 to 208 SGS 310 are executed. In 208SGS338, as shown in FIG. 13-21 (D), the set value is 5, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the low probability high base state or the low probability low base state. Based on this, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 58%. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 2%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 208SGS330 is not 5 (208SGS330; N), the effect control CPU 120 is variable, assuming that the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6. It is determined whether or not the display result is a big hit (208SGS339). Whether or not the variable display result is a big hit may be determined by determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS339; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS340), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (208SGS341).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS341; Y), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern based on the setting value of 6 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. (208SGS342), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In 208SGS342, as shown in FIG. 13-21 (E), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is performed at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 6 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. decide. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS341; N), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the setting value of 6 and the jackpot type being jackpot C (the jack-in effect is executed). 208SGS343), 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS343, as shown in FIG. 13-21 (E), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 6 and the jackpot type of jackpot C. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

If the variable display result is out of sync with the 208SGS339 (208SGS339; N), it is further determined whether or not the gaming state is a high-accuracy high-base state (208SGS344). The game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103.

When the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state (208SGS344; Y), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 6, the variable display result is out of order, and the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state. Whether or not to execute the in-effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS345), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS345, as shown in FIG. 13-21 (E), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 6, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the high accuracy and high base state. The non-execution of the in-effect is determined at a rate of 30%. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 30%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the gaming state is the low accuracy high base state or the low accuracy low base state (208SGS344; N), the set value is 6, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the low accuracy high base. The presence or absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the state or the low probability low base state (208 SGS 346), and the processes of 208 SGS 308 to 208 SGS 310 are executed. In 208SGS346, as shown in FIG. 13-21 (E), the set value is 6, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the low probability high base state or the low probability low base state. Based on this, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 57%. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 3%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ (PS2-5 or PB1-6) in the 208SGS302 (202SGS302; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS351). .. Whether or not the variable display result is a big hit may be determined by determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS351; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS352), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (208SGS353).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS353; Y), whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS354), and 208SGS308. ~ 208 The processing of SGS310 is executed. In 208SGS354, as shown in FIG. 13-22, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS353; N), whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the jackpot type being jackpot C (208SGS355), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are determined. To execute. In 208SGS355, as shown in FIG. 13-22, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the jackpot type being jackpot C. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the variable display result is out of alignment in 208SGS351 (208SGS351; N), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the fact that the variable display result is out of alignment (208SGS356), and 208SGS308 to 208SGS310. Executes the processing of. In 208SGS356, as shown in FIGS. 13-22, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 35% based on the fact that the variable display result is out of alignment. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 25%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

As described above, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 and 13-22, when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ or the super reach δ, the cut-in is performed. When the effect is not executed, the ratio of the variable display result to the big hit (big hit expectation) is the lowest, and when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-1, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-2. In this case, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit increases in the order of the case where the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-4. (Expectation of big hit in cut-in effect: non-execution <pattern CI-1 <pattern CI-2 <pattern CI-3 <pattern CI-4).

In particular, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-4, it is determined that the variable display result is a big hit and the big hit type is a big hit C regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-21, 13-22 and 13-24, when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ or the super reach δ, the cut-in effect is performed by the pattern CI-3. Regarding the execution ratio, the lowest setting (0%) is made when the set value is any of 1 to 3 and the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach γ and out of super reach δ. Then, when the fluctuation pattern is a super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect, the set value is one of 1 to 3 and the fluctuation pattern does not execute the revival effect-the set value when the per reach γ jackpot / super reach δ jackpot is used. If is 4 and the fluctuation pattern is a super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection effect, the set value is 5 and the fluctuation pattern is a super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection effect, the setting value is 6 and the fluctuation pattern. Is set so that the ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 increases in the order of the case where is a super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect.

Further, paying attention when the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 and PB1-4) of the super reach γ that does not execute the revival effect, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1-3, While it is confirmed that the variable display result is a big hit (any of big hit A to big hit C) when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 When is 4 to 6, the variable display result may be out of alignment even when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3. That is, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, the cut-in is higher than when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3. The jackpot expectation when the effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 is set low. Therefore, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, when the reach effect of the super reach γ is executed and the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is out of order, the pachinko gaming machine 1 It is confirmed that the set value set in is one of 4 to 6.

On the other hand, paying attention to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot (PB1-5) that executes the revival effect, the cut-in effect is the pattern CI-3 rather than the fluctuation pattern (PB1-4) of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect. And the rate of execution in pattern CI-4 is set low. For this reason, in the case where the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect, the cut-in effect is executed by CI-3 and the disappointment is notified, so that the pachinko gaming machine Even though the player recognizes that the set value set to 1 is one of 4 to 6, the revival effect is executed later and the pachinko is notified that it is a big hit. It is suppressed that the player is discouraged because it is uncertain whether or not the set value set in the game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach γ (PA2-4 and PB1-4) that does not execute the revival effect. Attention is paid to the case where the variable display result is a big hit, the ratio of the cut-in effect being executed in the pattern CI-3 is set to be the same in all the set values, but the variable display result is out of order. The higher the set value, the higher the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 (the pattern CI-3 execution rate at the time of deviation when the set values 4 to 6 are set: the set value 4 < Set value 5 <Set value 6).

Therefore, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the higher the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3, and the variable display result is out of order. Since the frequency of the game becomes higher, the player can be expected that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the game interest can be improved. There is.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6 and the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach γ (PA2-4 and PB1-4) that does not execute the revival effect. If the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same and the variable display result is different, the gaming state is low accuracy and high base state or low accuracy in the place where the game state is high accuracy and high base state. The cut-in effect is set to be executed in the pattern CI-3 at a higher rate than in the low base state.

Therefore, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 in the variable display in the high accuracy and high base state, and the variable display result is out of order, so that the gaming state is low accuracy. Even after shifting to the low base state, the pachinko game machine 1 is set to any of 4 to 6 to encourage the player to continue the game, so that the game enjoyment can be improved. ing.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 (B) to 13-21 (E), paying attention to the case where the variable display result is out of alignment, the higher the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the cut-in The execution rate of the production is set high. That is, in this feature unit 208SG, it is suggested that the ratio itself at which the cut-in effect is executed when the variable display result is out of alignment is set to any of the set values of 4 to 6 in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, in addition to whether or not the cut-in effect is executed in the effect pattern with high expectation of big hits, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the cut-in effect is executed. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, the determination ratios of the effect patterns of the cut-in effect shown in FIGS. 13-21 and 13-22 are merely examples, and the determination ratios of the effect patterns of the cut-in effect are determined according to the gaming machine to which the present invention is applied. It may be different from the feature unit 208SG as appropriate. However, when the determination ratios of the effect patterns of these cut-in effects are appropriately different, the tendency of the jackpot expectation of each effect pattern (big hit expectation in the cut-in effect: non-execution <pattern CI-1 <pattern CI-2). By maintaining the <Pattern CI-3 <Pattern CI-4) itself, the player does not misunderstand the jackpot expectation according to the production pattern of the cut-in effect when executing the cut-in effect. Is desirable.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 and 13-22, when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ and the super reach δ, the pachinko gaming machine 1 Although a mode in which the ratio of executing the cut-in effect during the variable display is changed according to the set value and the variable display result set in is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. When the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the reach γ or the super reach δ, the cut-in effect may be always executed during the variable display. In the case where the cut-in effect is always executed during the variable display of the super reach γ and the super reach δ, if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, When the variable display result is out of order, the ratio assigned to non-execution of the cut-in effect (see FIGS. 13-21 (C) to 13-21 (E)) is the pattern CI-1 with a low expectation of a big hit or By assigning to both the pattern CI-1 and the pattern CI-2, the ratio of the cut-in effect executed in the pattern CI-3 may be maintained so as not to be different from the feature unit 208SG. By doing so, the cut-in effect is excessively executed in the pattern CI-3 while improving the interest by executing the cut-in effect during the variable display of the super reach γ and the super reach δ. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily recognizing that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6.

FIG. 13-25 is a flowchart showing the advance notice effect determination process in FIG. 13-17. In the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (208SGS361). Then, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is a small hit (208SGS362). When the variable display result is a small hit (208SGS362; Y), the advance notice effect determination process is terminated, and when the variable display result is a big hit or a miss (208SGS362; N), the execution of the cut-in effect is further determined. Whether or not, that is, whether or not any production pattern of the cut-in effect is stored is determined (208SGS363).

When the execution of the cut-in effect is determined (208SGS363; Y), it is further determined whether or not the stored cut-in effect effect pattern is pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 (208SGS364). ). When the effect pattern of the stored cut-in effect is pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 (208SGS364; Y), the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4. , Whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect pattern are determined based on the specified variable display result and variation pattern (208SGS365).

On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the cut-in effect (208SGS363; N) or when the stored effect pattern is the pattern CI-1 or CI-2 (208SGS364; N), the variable display result is It is determined whether or not it is a big hit (208SGS366). When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS366; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS367), and whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect pattern are determined based on the specified big hit type (208SGS368).

When the variable display result is out of alignment (208SGS366; N), the presence / absence of execution of the advance notice effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the specified variable display result and the variation pattern (208SGS369).

Specifically, in the processing of 208SGS365, as shown in FIG. 13-26 (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 15%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 at a rate of 55%, and pattern YE-3 at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the variable display result is out of alignment and the fluctuation pattern is super reach (out of super reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 50%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the variable display result is out of alignment and the fluctuation pattern is normal reach (out of normal reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 80%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 15%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the variable display result is out of reach and the fluctuation pattern is non-reach (non-reach out of reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 5%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 0%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

As described above, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the case where the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is out of order is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. This is a case where the set value is any of 4 to 6 and the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ deviation (PA2-4).

As shown in FIGS. 13-26 (C) and 13-30, the pattern YE-1 is an effect pattern for displaying the image 208SG005s of the character A together with the blue effect on the image display device 5, and the pattern YE-2 is an effect pattern. The image display device 5 is an effect pattern for displaying the image 208SG005t of the character B together with the red effect, and the pattern YE-3 is an effect pattern for displaying the image 208SG005u of the character C with the golden effect on the image display device 5. The pattern YE-4 is an effect pattern for displaying the collective image 208SG005v of the characters A to C together with the rainbow-colored effect on the image display device 5.

Further, in the processing of 208SGS368, as shown in FIG. 13-26 (B), when the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 10%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 45%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 15%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. If the jackpot type is jackpot C, the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 10%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 at a rate of 40%, and pattern YE-3 at a rate of 15%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

Further, in the processing of 208SGS369, as shown in FIG. 13-26 (B), when the variable display result is out of alignment and the fluctuation pattern is super reach (out of super reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is 50%. Determined by percentage. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 at a rate of 15%, and pattern YE-3 at a rate of 5%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Also,
Further, when the variable display result is out of alignment and the fluctuation pattern is normal reach (out of normal reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 80%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 15%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the variable display result is out of reach and the fluctuation pattern is non-reach (non-reach out of reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 5%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 0%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

As described above, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the ratio (big hit expectation degree) at which the variable display result becomes the big hit is set to be the lowest when the notice effect is not executed during the variable display, and the notice effect is a pattern. Variable display in the order of execution in YE-1, the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-2, the advance notice effect is executed in YE-3, and the advance notice effect is executed in YE-4. The rate at which the result is a big hit is set to be high (expectation of big hit of notice effect: not execute notice effect <execute in pattern YE-1 <execute in pattern YE-2 <execute in pattern YE-3 <pattern Executed with YE-4).

In particular, as shown in FIG. 13-26 (B), when the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined, or the cut-in effect is a pattern CI- When the execution in 1 or the pattern CI-2 is decided, the advance notice effect may be executed in the pattern YE-4 only when the jackpot type is the jackpot C. Therefore, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, in addition to whether or not the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-3, the game also determines whether or not the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-4. It is possible to draw people's attention.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-26 (A), as the effect pattern of the cut-in effect, the pattern CI-3, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the pattern CI-1 and the pattern CI-2, or the variable display result is a big hit. When the pattern CI-4 that confirms that the jackpot type is jackpot C is determined, YE-3 or YE-4 is used as the effect pattern of the advance notice effect regardless of the variable display result or the fluctuation pattern. It is set so that it will not be executed. Therefore, when the variable display result is a big hit, the cut-in effect can be executed only by the pattern YE-1 and the pattern YE-2, so that the variable display result is a big hit, which is the start of the cut-in effect. It is prevented that the player recognizes the timing before the timing (the start timing of the advance notice effect). Further, when the variable display result is out of alignment, neither the advance notice effect nor the cut-in effect is executed in the effect pattern with high expectation of big hit, so that the player is excessively opposed to the variable display result being a big hit. It is prevented from expecting.

After executing any of the processes of 208SGS365, 208SGS368, and 208SGS369, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the advance notice effect is determined (208SGS370). When the execution of the advance notice effect is decided (208SGS370; Y), the effect pattern determined by any of the processes of 208SGS365, 208SGS368, and 208SGS369 is stored (208SGS371), and the advance notice effect start waiting timer is set to give a notice. The production determination process is completed (208SGS372). When it is determined not to execute the advance notice effect (208SGS370; N), the advance notice effect determination process is terminated without executing the processes of 208SGS371 and 208SGS372.

When the execution of the advance notice effect is determined in the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the advance notice effect start waiting timer by -1 each time the variable display effect process (S172) is executed, and the advance notice is given. When the effect start waiting timer expires, the advance notice effect process table according to the determined effect pattern is set. After that, each time the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display, the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 909) is in accordance with the contents of the data (process data) in the advance notice effect process table. Etc.), and the advance notice effect may be executed.

As described above, by making it possible to determine the execution of the cut-in effect and the advance notice effect within the variable display start setting process, as shown in FIGS. 13-27 (A) to 13-27 (C), non-reach In the out-of-range fluctuation pattern, the advance notice effect can be executed only in the pattern YE-1 during the variable display, and in the normal reach out-of-reach variation pattern, the advance notice effect is performed in the period before the reach during the variable display in the pattern YE-. It is possible to execute with 1 and pattern YE-2, and in the fluctuation pattern of super reach α off and super reach β off, the notice effect is given in the period before reach during variable display pattern YE-1 to pattern YE-. It can be executed in 3. It should be noted that the cut-in effect cannot be executed in the period after the reach in the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach deviation, the super reach α deviation, and the super reach γ deviation.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-28, in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ deviation and the super reach δ deviation, the advance notice effect can be executed by the patterns YE-1 to YE-3 in the period before the reach. In the period after the reach, the cut-in effect can be executed by the patterns CI-1 to pattern CI-3. However, when the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in the pattern CI-3, the advance notice effect can be executed only in the pattern YE-1 and the pattern YE-2.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-29 (A) and 13-29 (B), in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect, the advance notice effect is performed in the period before the reach YE-1 to 1. The pattern YE-4 can be executed, and the cut-in effect can be executed by the patterns CI-1 to the pattern CI-4 in the period after the reach. However, when the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in the pattern CI-3 or the pattern CI-4, the advance notice effect can be executed only in the pattern YE-1 and the pattern YE-2.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 at the time of executing the variable display in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-30 to 13-32. First, as shown in FIGS. 13-30 (A) to 13-30 (E), when the execution of the advance notice effect is determined at the start of the variable display, the advance notice effect is pattern YE- in the image display device 5. It is executed by any of 1 to pattern YE-4. Specifically, when the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-1, the image 208SG005s of the character A is displayed together with the blue effect on the image display device 5, and the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-2. When the image 208SG005t of the character B is displayed with the red effect on the image display device 5 and the advance notice effect is executed by the pattern YE-3, the image 208SG005u of the character C is displayed with the golden effect on the image display device 5. When the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-4, the collective image 208SG005v of the characters A to C is displayed on the image display device 5 together with the rainbow-colored effect.

At this time, the player expects a big hit depending on which character's image 208SG005s, 208SG005t, 208SG005u, 208SG005v the image displayed on the image display device 5 is, and the color of the effect displayed together with the image of these characters. It is possible to recognize the degree.

As described above, when the cut-in effect is determined to be executed by the pattern CI-3 or the pattern CI-4 at the start of the variable display, the advance notice effect is executed only by the pattern YE-1 or the pattern YE-2. It is possible.

When the variable display is a variable display of the super reach γ, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination of reach as shown in FIGS. 13-31 (A) to 13-31 (C), and then the super reach is displayed. A reach effect of γ (a battle effect in which a ally character and an enemy character fight in this feature unit 208SG) is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-31 (D), when the cut-in effect execution start timing during the reach effect of the super reach γ is reached, the image display device 5 starts displaying the image of the push button 31B, and the player A promotion notification is performed to urge the user to operate the push button 31B. At this time, the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, or the player operates the push button 31B without operating the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. When the reception period elapses, the effect is displayed on the image display device 5 together with the cut-in image corresponding to the effect pattern of the cut-in effect.

Specifically, when the effect pattern of the cut-in effect is pattern CI-1
When the cut-in image 208SG005w is displayed with the blue effect on the image display device 5 and the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-2, the cut-in image 208SG005x is displayed with the red effect on the image display device 5 and cut. When the in-effect is executed by the pattern CI-3, the cut-in image 208SG005y is displayed together with the golden effect on the image display device 5, and when the advance notice effect is executed by the pattern YE-4, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 208SG005y. The cut-in image 208SG005z is displayed with a rainbow effect.

At this time, the player decides which of the cut-in images 208SG005w, 208SG005x, 208SG005y, and 208SG005z is the cut-in image displayed on the image display device 5, and the color of the effect displayed together with these cut-in images. It is possible to recognize the degree of expectation of a big hit.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 13-32 (A) and 13-32 (B), when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is PS2-4 (variation pattern of the super reach γ out of line), the super reach γ As a reach effect result (battle effect result), when the ally character loses to the enemy character, it is notified that the variable display result is out of order, and the variable display ends. Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-32 (A) and 13-32 (C), when the variable display variation pattern is PB1-4 (super reach γ jackpot variation pattern that does not execute the revival effect). , As the reach effect result (battle effect result) of the super reach γ, when the ally character wins the enemy character, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit, and the variable display ends.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-32 (A) and 13-32 (D) to 13-32 (F), the variation pattern of the variable display is PB1-5 (super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect). In the case of (variation pattern), it is notified that the variable display result is once out of order due to the defeat of the ally character by the enemy character as the reach effect result (battle effect result) of the super reach γ. Then, when the revival effect is executed, it is notified again that the variable display result is a big hit when the ally character reverses to the enemy character and wins as the reach effect result (battle effect result) of the super reach γ. The variable display ends.

Although not shown in particular, when the variable display is a variable display of super reach δ, after the decorative pattern is displayed in a combination of reach, the ally character and the enemy character are displayed in the same manner as the reach effect of super reach γ. Battle production) is executed. Then, when the cut-in effect is executed during the battle effect, the variable display result is always a big hit by executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3. The battle production as the reach production of Super Reach δ may be the same as the battle production as the reach production of Super Reach γ, but the characters to be played against and the development of the battle are partially different. You may.

As described above, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-21, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the cut-in effect is the pattern CI. While it is confirmed that the variable display result will be a big hit by executing in -3, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, the cut-in effect is produced. There is a case where the variable display result is out of alignment when executed in the pattern CI-3. That is, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is out of order, it is determined that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. , When the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the player can pay attention to whether the variable display result is a big hit or a miss, and the game interest can be improved. There is.

In addition, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-21, after notifying that the variable display result is out of order as a variable pattern in which the cut-in effect can be executed during the reach effect. Super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern (super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern that executes resurrection effect, PB1-5) and super reach that does not execute resurrection effect to notify that the variable display result is a jackpot by executing the resurrection effect A fluctuation pattern of γ jackpot (PB1-4) is provided, and when variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect, the fluctuation of super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect. The ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 is set lower than that in the case of executing the variable display in the pattern. Therefore, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display is notified that the variable display is out of order during the reach effect of the super reach γ, the set value set by the player in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. Even if it recognizes that is any of 4 to 6, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4 to 6 by notifying that the revival effect is executed and the variable display is a big hit. It is possible to reduce the deterioration of the game interest due to an error in recognizing that it is one of the above.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the disadvantage setting values are set to 1 to 3 and the advantageous setting values are set to 4 to 6 as the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the setting values are set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The determination ratio of the effect pattern of the cut-in effect or the advance notice effect is different depending on whether the set value is the disadvantageous set value or the advantageous set value, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as the disadvantage setting value includes 1 and the advantage setting value includes 6, they may be set in any range in which the values do not overlap with each other. Specifically, the disadvantage setting value may be 1 to 5 and the advantage setting value may be only 6, or the disadvantage setting value may be only 1 and the advantage setting value may be 2 to 6.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, an embodiment in which the suggestion effect in the present invention is described as a reach effect is illustrated, but the invention is not limited to this, and the suggestion effect in the present invention is being variably displayed. As long as it is an effect that can be executed, for example, an effect other than the reach effect may be used, such as a pseudo continuous effect in which a temporary stop of a decorative pattern and a revariable display are repeatedly executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 (C) to 13-21 (E), the fluctuation of the super reach γ deviation when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. When the variable display is executed in the pattern, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the ratio of the cut-in effect being executed in the pattern CI-3 is the highest, and the pachinko game When the set value set in the machine 1 is 4, the ratio of the cut-in effect being executed in the pattern CI-3 is set to be the lowest. Therefore, the higher the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the higher the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is out of order, and the higher the set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since the player can be expected to be set, the game entertainment can be improved.

In the feature unit 208SG of the embodiment, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ out of line. Illustrates a mode in which the higher the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the higher the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3. It is not limited, and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ out of line, the pachinko game Regardless of the set value set in the machine 1, the ratio at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 may be the same ratio. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 in the variable display of the deviation of the super reach γ, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. It can be difficult to identify the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-6, which reach effect is to be executed and whether to execute the revival effect is determined in advance in association with each variation pattern, and is also determined in FIG. 13-13. As shown in (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table of 1 regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, when the variable display result is a big hit, the ratio of executing the revival effect during the variable display is the same regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For this reason, the execution rate of the resurrection effect during the variable display follows the set value that determines the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit, so the player should pay attention to whether or not the resurrection effect is executed during the variable display. And can improve the game entertainment.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the reach effect and whether or not to execute the revival effect is illustrated by exemplifying a form that is determined in advance in association with each variation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute the reach effect and whether or not to execute the revival effect is changed by the effect control CPU 120 after the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern. It may be appropriately determined from the display result and the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-6 and 13-22, as the fluctuation pattern in the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern for executing the reach effect of the super reach δ (PA2-5 and PB1-6). Is provided, and when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach δ, the variable display result is always a big hit, so that the variation of the super reach effect increases and the super Since the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the reach δ and the player can pay attention to whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit, the game interest can be improved.

In addition, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the embodiment in which the variation pattern (PA2-5 and PB1-6) for executing the reach effect of the super reach δ is provided has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Therefore, it is also possible not to provide a variation pattern for executing the reach effect of the super reach δ.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as the effects that can be executed during the variable display, a notice effect that can be executed during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach (or until the end timing of the variable display) and the reach. There is a cut-in effect that can be executed during the effect. Further, the advance notice effect can be executed by any of a plurality of effect patterns (patterns YE-1 to pattern YE-4) having different jackpot expectations. Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-26, when the variable display result is a big hit and the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in the pattern CI-3 or the pattern CI-4, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit. Determines the effect pattern from the effect patterns (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) excluding the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4, which are highly expected to hit the jackpot, when the advance notice effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result will be a big hit by being executed by YE-3 or YE-4. Therefore, if it is decided to execute the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-4, whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit by executing the advance notice effect in the pattern YE-1 or the pattern YE-2. It is possible to pay attention to the crab until the variable display is completed, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13-27 and 13-28, during the variable display of 1, the advance notice effect is set before the cut-in effect (from the start of the variable display). By making it executable during the period until reach), if the variable display result becomes a big hit, the player recognizes that the variable display result becomes a big hit from the timing before the cut-in effect is executed. This can be prevented and the deterioration of the game interest can be prevented.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, an embodiment in which the advance notice effect can be executed at a timing prior to the cut-in effect during the variable display of 1, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the advance notice effect may be executed as a look-ahead effect during the variable display that is executed before the variable display that executes the cut-in effect. Further, the advance notice effect is executed during the period from the start of the cut-in effect to the end of the reach effect, so that the variable display result is obtained in the period from the start of the cut-in effect to the end of the reach effect. It may be possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the game is a big hit and prevent the game from being enjoyed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 and 13-22, when the variable display result is a big hit, the big hit type is always big hit C when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-4. On the other hand, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the jackpot type can be any of the jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, so the cut-in effect is changed to the pattern CI-4 during the variable display. It is possible to draw attention to the player whether or not it is executed. Further, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3, there is a possibility that the big hit type is the big hit A or the big hit B. Therefore, the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result. In the case of a miss, it is possible to make the player think that even if it is a big hit, it may have been a big hit A or a big hit B, so the game interest for the variable display result being missed. Can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-26, any of 4 to 6 is set as a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (that is, the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is obtained. If the cut-in effect is decided to be executed in the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, when the advance notice effect is executed, the expectation of a big hit is high. Since the effect pattern is determined from the effect patterns (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) excluding the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4, the advance notice effect is executed by the patterns YE-3 and YE-4. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result will be a big hit. Therefore, even though the variable display result does not become a big hit, the player against the fact that the variable display result becomes a big hit when the pattern CI-3 and the patterns YE-3 and YE-4 are executed during the same variable display. It is possible to prevent the expectation of the above from being excessively raised.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, any one of 4 to 6 is set as a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the cut-in effect is the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit. The execution ratio of the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4 is set to 0% as a form of restricting the execution of the advance notice effect in the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4 when the execution of the advance notice effect is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any of 4 to 6 can be set as a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 though the embodiment is illustrated by the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-4. When the cut-in effect is set and the execution is decided in the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, the advance notice effect is given at a lower rate than the pattern YE-1 and the pattern YE-2. It may be possible to execute with the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-4. That is, in the present claim, "when the advantageous setting value is set and it is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the suggestion effect is performed in an embodiment including the specific effect. When it is executed, the execution of the second predetermined effect is restricted. ”In order to prevent the advance notice effect from being executed by the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-4, the advance notice effect is performed by the pattern YE-1 or the pattern. A form in which the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-4 is executed at a lower rate than the case where the YE-2 is executed is also included.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-21, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of the super reach γ. In this case, if the set values are the same, the ratio of the cut-in effect being executed in the pattern CI-3 in the high-accuracy high-base state is the cut-in effect in the low-accuracy low-base state and the low-accuracy high-base state. It is set higher than the rate executed in pattern CI-3. Therefore, when the gaming state is the high-accuracy high-base state, the cut-in effect is produced in the variable display of the super reach γ out of line compared to the case where the gaming state is the low-accuracy low-base state or the low-accuracy high-base state. Since the ratio of execution in the pattern CI-3 is high, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6 in the high accuracy and high base state. After the player recognizes that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6 by executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 in the high accuracy and high base state. Is able to improve the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 because it is easy for the player to continue the game even after the gaming state shifts to the low probability low base state.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the variable display is displayed by the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) of the super reach γ deviation. When executed, when the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state, if the set values are the same, the cut-in rate is higher than when the gaming state is the low accuracy low base state or the low accuracy high base state. Although the embodiment in which the effect can be performed by the pattern CI-3 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. Moreover, when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of the super reach γ, the cut-in effect can be executed in the pattern CI-3 when the gaming state is the high accuracy and high base state. When the gaming state is a low probability low base state or a low probability high base state, the cut-in effect may be disabled by the pattern CI-3.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and the present invention includes any changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention. ..

For example, in the feature unit 208SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-21, when the variable display is executed in the variation pattern (PB1-5) for executing the resurrection effect, the variation pattern in which the resurrection effect is not executed is executed. Although the embodiment in which the cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3 at a lower rate than the case where the variable display is executed by (PA2-4 or PB1-4) is illustrated, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as a modified example 208SG-1, as shown in FIGS. 13-33 (A) to 13-33 (E), when variable display is executed in a variable pattern (PB1-5) for executing a revival effect. May make the cut-in effect infeasible with pattern CI-3. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and it is notified that the variable display result is out of order, any of 4 to 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Even though the player recognizes that it is set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the game interest due to the fact that the revival effect is executed and the variable display result is notified that the jackpot is a big hit.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the above-described embodiment, when the variable display is executed by the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the resurrection effect, the variable display is performed by the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection effect. Although the embodiment in which the ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 is set to be lower than that in the case of executing the above is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and FIG. 13 is shown as a modified example 208SG-2. As shown in −34 (A) to 13-34 (D), when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect, the super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect The ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 may be set higher than in the case of executing the variable display in the variable pattern. By doing so, for example, the player places more importance on whether or not the variable display result is a big hit than whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. In the case of, after the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and it is notified that the variable display result is out of order, the revival effect is further executed and the variable display result is a big hit. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is notified, it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the above-described embodiment, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot (PB1-5) that executes the revival effect regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 6. ), The cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is shown as a modified example 208SG-3. As shown in 13-35 (A) to 13-35 (C), when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect is executed. When the variable display is executed by the fluctuation pattern (PB1-5) of, the cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3, while the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are 1 to 3. In any case, the cut-in effect may be disabled in the pattern CI-3 when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PB1-5) of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect. By doing so, when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PB1-5) of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect, the variable display result becomes a jackpot and the pachinko game machine 1 is set. It is confirmed that the set value is one of 4 to 6, and the revival effect is executed after it is once notified that the variable display result will be out of order during the reach effect of the super reach γ during the variable display. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the variable display result is notified to be a big hit, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

That is, in the feature unit 208SG, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ, the setting is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 even if the variable display result is out of order. By determining that the value is any of 4 to 6, it is possible to promote the continuation of the game for the player, but in this feature unit 208SG-3, the reach of the super reach γ is being produced. When the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the variable display result becomes a big hit, and the player determines that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. However, it is possible to promote the continuation of the game.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13-26, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ is out of alignment. When the variable display is executed in (PA2-4), if the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in the pattern CI-1 or the pattern CI-2, which is an effect pattern with a low expectation of a big hit, the cut-in effect is executed. Illustrates a mode in which the advance notice effect can be executed by the pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than when the execution by the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, is determined. The present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 13-36 (A) to 13-36 (C) as the modified example 208SG-4, the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are 4 to 6. When the variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of the super reach γ, the cut-in effect is decided to be executed with the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit. If this is the case, the cut-in effect will be performed with pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than when execution is decided with pattern CI-1 or pattern CI-2, which is an effect pattern with a low expectation of big hits. It may be feasible. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ, and when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-1 or the pattern CI-2. By executing the advance notice effect in the pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than that, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result is out of order, so that the variable display result can be obtained. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it will be a big hit, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 (C) to 13-21 (E), the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. And when the variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) of the super reach γ, if the gaming state is the high accuracy and high base state, the gaming state is low if the set values are the same. Although the embodiment in which the cut-in effect can be performed by the pattern CI-3 at a higher rate than in the case of the low accuracy base state or the low accuracy high base state is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is a modification. As shown in FIG. 13-37 as 208SG-5, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and is variably displayed by the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) of the super reach γ deviation. When is executed, if the gaming state is a low-accuracy low-base state or a low-accuracy high-base state, if the set values are the same, the gaming state is cut at a higher rate than in the high-accuracy high-base state. The in-effect may be executed by the pattern CI-3.

By doing so, when the gaming state is the low-accuracy low-base state or the low-accuracy high-base state, the rate during the reach production of the super reach γ is higher than that when the gaming state is the high-accuracy high-base state. Since the cut-in effect is easily executed by the pattern CI-3, for example, the variable display result does not become a big hit over a long period of time (for example, 1000 variable displays) in the low accuracy low base state, so that the player When the motivation to continue playing the game is reduced, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, that is, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. Is notified to the player, so that the player's willingness to continue playing the game can be improved, so that the game interest in the low-accuracy low-base state and the low-accuracy high-base state can be improved.

In the present modification 208SG-5, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) of the super reach γ deviation. At that time, when the gaming state is the low accuracy low base state or the low accuracy high base state, if the set values are the same, the cut-in effect is produced at a higher rate than when the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state. Although the embodiment that can be performed by the pattern CI-3 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a modification 208SG-6 as shown in FIG. 13-38. When the set value is any of 4 to 6 and the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of the super reach γ, the gaming state is the low probability low base state or the low probability high base state. In the case of, the cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3, while the cut-in effect may be disabled by the pattern CI-3 when the gaming state is the high accuracy and high base state. By doing so, the cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ only when the game state is the low accuracy low base state or the low accuracy high base state. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to the low-determined base state and the low-accuracy high-base state, in which the variable display result is less likely to be a big hit than the high-based state, the game entertainment of these low-determined base state and low-accuracy high-base state Can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the cut-in effect can be executed during the reach effect of the super reach γ or the super reach δ is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, as shown in FIGS. 13-39 (A) and 13-39 (B) as the modified example 208SG-7, during the reach production of the super reach γ and the super reach δ, the pachinko game is performed instead of the cut-in effect. The set value suggestion effect suggesting the set value set in the machine 1 may be executable. When the set value suggestion effect can be executed during the reach effect of the super reach γ or the super reach δ in this way, the period before the executable period (during the reach effect) of the set value suggestion effect (for example). , The period from the start of the variable display to the reach), the above-mentioned advance notice effect may be executed, and the execution rate of the set value suggestion effect may be different depending on the effect pattern of the advance notice effect.

Specifically, when the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-4, the set value is higher than that in the case where the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-1 or the pattern YE-2. It suffices to make the suggestion effect feasible. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which effect pattern the advance notice effect is executed in, and when the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-4, , Since the player can pay attention to whether or not the set value suggestion effect is executed during the reach effect, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the set value suggestion effect.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Frame LED
10… General winning opening 11… Main board 12… Production control board 13… Voice control board 14… LED control board 15… Relay board 17… Special variable winning ball device 20… Ordinary symbol display 21… Gate switch 22A, 22B… Start Mouth switch 23 ... 1st count switch 24 ... 2nd count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 41 ... Passing gate 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit

Claims (1)

Any setting value can be set from a plurality of setting values including a disadvantage setting value and an advantageous setting value having a higher advantage for the player than the disadvantage setting value, which can be controlled to an advantageous state favorable to the player. It is a game machine that can be set
A game state control means that can control a plurality of game states,
A special effect executing means capable of displaying a specific image and temporarily making the predetermined display difficult to see when the game state is switched is provided.
The special effect execution means is
A plurality of types of specific images can be displayed, and different types of specific images are displayed according to the gaming state when controlled to an advantageous state, and as the special effect, the specific images are displayed to display the predetermined display. After executing the pseudo-closing effect that makes it difficult to see, the opening effect that the specific image is separated and the predetermined display becomes visible is executed.
further,
A decidable means capable of deciding to control to the advantageous state,
Based on the determination result of the determination means, the suggestion effect execution means that can execute the suggestion effect suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled in the mode including the specific effect and the mode not including the specific effect,
A special notification effect execution means capable of executing a special notification effect that is different from the specific effect and notifies that the effect is controlled to the advantageous state.
With
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state.
The suggestion effect execution means
When the disadvantage setting value is set and it is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the suggestion effect of the aspect including the specific effect cannot be executed.
When the advantageous setting value is set and it is not determined by the determination means that the advantageous state is controlled, the suggestion effect of the aspect including the specific effect can be executed.
When the special notification effect is executed and controlled to the advantageous state, it is controlled to the second advantageous state.
A gaming machine characterized in that when the suggestion effect of an aspect including the specific effect is executed and controlled to the advantageous state, it is controlled to the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state.